table of contents - lexus€¦ · the navigation system is one of the most technologically advanced...

11

1 QUICK GUIDE 9

2 BASIC FUNCTION 27

3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 60

4 PHONE 137

5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM 200

6 AIR CONDITIONING 283

7 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 297

8 INFORMATION 311

9 LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT 335

10 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 363

INDEX 379

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2

Introduction

This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manualcarefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times.The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the navigation system dif-fer depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the map dataavailable at the time of producing this document.

The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accesso-ries ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using these signals andother vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locatinga desired destination.The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present startinglocation to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you to a destinationthat is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses DENSO maps. The cal-culated routes may not be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own per-sonal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculated routes.The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow you toeasily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination is not in the da-tabase, you can enter the street address or a major intersection close to it and the sys-tem will guide you there.The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructionswill announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when approaching anintersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and aretimed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations thatmay affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position de-pends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circum-stances. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer to pages 133through 135.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

3

For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention with thefollowing marks.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

CAUTION

●This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning isignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk ofinjury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

● This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipmentif the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order toavoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS

Safety symbolThe symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not dothis”, or “Do not let this happen.”

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)used to operate switches and other devic-es.

Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.a lid opens).

4

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

No. Name Description

Operational Outlines An outline of the operation is explained.

Main Operations The steps of an operation are explained.

Related Operations A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.

Information Useful information for the user is described.

5

To use this system in the safest possiblemanner, follow all the safety tips shown be-low.This system is intended to assist in reachingthe destination and, if used properly, can doso. The driver is solely responsible for thesafe operation of your vehicle and the safetyof your passengers.Do not use any feature of this system to theextent it becomes a distraction and pre-vents safe driving. The first priority whiledriving should always be the safe operationof the vehicle. While driving, be sure to ob-serve all traffic regulations. Prior to the actual use of this system, learnhow to use it and become thoroughly famil-iar with it. Read the entire Navigation Sys-tem Owner’s Manual to make sure youunderstand the system. Do not allow otherpeople to use this system until they haveread and understood the instructions in thismanual.For your safety, some functions may be-come inoperable when driving. Unavailablescreen buttons are dimmed. Only when thevehicle is not moving, can the destinationand route selection be done.

While driving, listen to the voice instructionsas much as possible and glance at thescreen briefly and only when it is safe. How-ever, do not totally rely on voice guidance.Use it just for reference. If the system can-not determine the current position correct-ly, there is a possibility of incorrect, late, ornon-voice guidance.The data in the system may occasionally beincomplete. Road conditions, includingdriving restrictions (no left turns, street clo-sures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,before following any instructions from thesystem, look to see whether the instructioncan be done safely and legally.This system cannot warn about such thingsas the safety of an area, condition of streets,and availability of emergency services. If un-sure about the safety of an area, do not driveinto it. Under no circumstances is this sys-tem a substitute for the driver’s personaljudgement.Use this system only in locations where it islegal to do so. Some states/provinces mayhave laws prohibiting the use of video andnavigation screens next to the driver.

SAFETY INSTRUCTION CAUTION

●For safety, the driver should not operatethe navigation system while he/she isdriving. Insufficient attention to the roadand traffic may cause an accident.

●While driving, be sure to obey the trafficregulations and maintain awareness ofthe road conditions. If a traffic sign on theroad has been changed, route guidancemay not have the updated informationsuch as the direction of a one way street.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION..................... 10

OVERVIEW BUTTON AND GUIDANCE SCREEN .................................... 10

REGISTERING HOME....................................... 12REGISTERING PRESET

DESTINATIONS ................................................. 14OPERATION FLOW:

GUIDING THE ROUTE.................................. 16SETTING HOME AS THE

DESTINATION.....................................................17

2. FUNCTION INDEX ...................................... 18

NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX.......................................... 18

3. QUICK REFERENCE.................................. 20

“Destination” SCREEN........................................20“Setup” SCREEN.................................................... 22“Information” SCREEN........................................ 24

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ............................................... 28

INITIAL SCREEN ..................................................28TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION.................29INPUTTING LETTERS AND

NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION.......................................................30

SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ..................................33MAP SCREEN OPERATION.........................35

2. SETUP ................................................................ 46

GENERAL SETTINGS .......................................46VOICE SETTINGS ...............................................56

1. DESTINATION SEARCH............................ 62

DESTINATION SEARCH ................................ 62STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE .................81

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE ................................... 84

ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN .................... 84TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE

PROMPTS............................................................. 87DISTANCE AND TIME TO

DESTINATION .................................................. 90SETTING AND DELETING

DESTINATIONS..................................................91SETTING ROUTE................................................. 93

3. ADDRESS BOOK ....................................... 102

NAVIGATION SETTINGS............................ 102

4. SETUP ................................................................ 117

DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS............................................................. 117

VEHICLE SETTINGS......................................... 127

5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)...................................................... 133

LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM .............................133

1 QUICK GUIDE

2 BASIC FUNCTION

3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

7

10

1. PHONE OPERATION................................138

QUICK REFERENCE .......................................138PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM

FOR CELLULAR PHONE) ........................140REGISTER A

Bluetooth® PHONE ....................................... 146CALL ON THE

Bluetooth® PHONE ........................................ 151RECEIVE ON THE

Bluetooth® PHONE .......................................158TALK ON THE

Bluetooth® PHONE .......................................159Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE

FUNCTION........................................................ 162

2. SETUP .............................................................. 165

PHONE SETTINGS ........................................... 165Bluetooth® SETTINGS...................................... 187

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION.............................................202

QUICK REFERENCE......................................202SOME BASICS ...................................................204RADIO OPERATION ...................................... 210HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY

INFORMATION.............................................. 213RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite

Radio BROADCAST).....................................217RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET

RADIO BROADCAST)............................... 222DVD PLAYER OPERATION....................... 223USB MEMORY OPERATION ................... 244iPod OPERATION ............................................250Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION ........... 257AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE

CONTROLS (STEERING SWITCHES) ...........................268

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS.................................... 270

2. SETUP ............................................................ 280

AUDIO SETTINGS ...........................................280

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION.............................................284

QUICK REFERENCE......................................284SOME BASICS ...................................................286USING THE AIR CONDITIONING

SYSTEM ..............................................................287

4 PHONE 5 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

6 AIR CONDITIONING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

8

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION ............................................ 298

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM..................298NATURAL SPEECH

INFORMATION (ENGLISH ONLY) ........................................304

EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS................................................. 306

COMMAND LIST..............................................307

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY....................... 312

MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA ...................................... 312

2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW ............... 314

XM SERVICES ..................................................... 314

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION ..............317

XM Sports ............................................................... 317XM Stocks ..............................................................320XM Fuel Prices .....................................................323XM NavWeather™............................................326XM NavTraffic® ................................................. 330

4. SETUP ............................................................. 333

XM SETTINGS ....................................................333

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW ..................... 336

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW....................... 336TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY

USING A CELLULAR PHONE.............. 337TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY

USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ........................... 342

TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM.................................................... 345

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION ................... 346

APPS ........................................................................ 346Destination Assist................................................353eDestination...........................................................355Lexus Insider..........................................................358

1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM........ 364

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ........... 364REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ............................................. 366THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW............368

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST............... 370

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST .................... 370INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

SETTING..............................................................377

ALPHABETICAL INDEX............................. 380

7 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

8 INFORMATION

9 LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

10 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

INDEX

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

9

10

1. OVERVIEW BUTTON AND GUIDANCE SCREEN ........................... 10

2. REGISTERING HOME............................. 12

3. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS....................................... 14

4. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE......................... 16

5. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION ......................................... 17

1. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX ................................ 18

1. “Destination” SCREEN ............................. 20

2. “Setup” SCREEN ........................................ 22

3. “Information” SCREEN............................. 24

1 NAVIGATION OPERATION

2 FUNCTION INDEX

3 QUICK REFERENCE

QUICK GUIDE

10

1. NAVIGATION OPERATION

1. OVERVIEW BUTTON AND GUIDANCE SCREEN

No. Name Function Page

North-up or heading-up symbol

This symbol indicates whether the map orienta-tion is set to north-up or heading-up. Touching thissymbol changes the map orientation. Both north-up and heading-up symbols display the vehiclesdirection as a letter (e.g. N for north).

45

Scale indicator This figure indicates the map scale. 43

“MAP/VOICE”button

Press to repeat a voice guidance, cancel scrollingon the map screen, start guidance, and to displaythe current position.

35, 85, 87

“DEST” button Press to display the “Destination” screen. 12, 14, 16, 17, 20, 62

“SETUP” button Press to display the “Setup” screen.

22, 46, 56, 102, 117, 127, 165,

187, 280, 333

Zoom out button Touch to reduce the map scale. 43

“Off”Touch to obtain a broader view. Some of the but-tons on the screen will not be displayed. They aredisplayed again by touching “On”.

123


1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

11

“PWR·VOL” knob: Press and hold for 3 seconds or more to turn off the screen and restartthe navigation system. Do this when the vehicle-mounted device response is extremelyslow.

“Mark” Touch to register the current position or the cur-sor position as an address book entry. 37

“Route” Touch to change the route. 91, 93

“Show on Map”Touch to browse information about guidanceroute, to set the POI (Point of Interest) icons to bedisplayed on the screen, to record the route, etc.

98, 331, 357

Zoom in button Touch to magnify the map scale. 43

Foot print mapbutton

Touch to display the foot print map and the build-ing information. 44

“INFO” Press to display the “Information” screen.

24, 312, 317, 320, 323, 326, 330, 346,

358

“Map Mode” Touch to display the “Map Mode” screen. 40

Distance and time to destina-tion

Touch to display the distance, estimated traveland arrival time to the destination. 90

XM indicator This mark is displayed when XM information is re-ceived. 329, 331

“GPS” mark (Global Position-ing System)

Whenever the vehicle is receiving signals from theGPS, this mark is displayed. 133


12


2. REGISTERING HOME

Press the “DEST” button.

Touch “Go Home”.

If a home address has not been regis-tered, it can be registered by touching“Go Home”.

Touch “Yes”.

There are 4 different methods tosearch your home. (See “DESTINA-TION SEARCH” on page 62.)

Touch “Enter”.

The “Edit Home” screen is displayed.

1

2

3

4

5


1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

13

Touch “OK”.

Registration of home is complete. Home can also be registered by touching“Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. (See“REGISTERING HOME” on page 103.) The name, location, phone number andicon can be changed. (See “EDITINGHOME” on page 104.)The registered points can be used on the“Destination” screen. (See “DESTINA-TION SEARCH BY HOME” on page63.)

6

14


3. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS


Touch one of the preset destinationbuttons.

A preset destination can be set to any pre-set destination button that has not yetbeen set.

Touch “Yes”.

There are 4 different methods tosearch preset destinations. (See“DESTINATION SEARCH” onpage 62.)

Touch “Enter”.

The “Edit Preset Destination” screen isdisplayed.

1

2

3

4

5


1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

15

Touch “OK”.

Registration of preset destinations is com-plete.Preset destinations can also be registeredby touching “Navigation” on the “Setup”screen. (See “REGISTERING PRESETDESTINATIONS” on page 105.)The name, location, phone number andicon can be changed. (See “EDITINGPRESET DESTINATIONS” on page106.)The registered points can be used on the“Destination” screen. (See “DESTINA-TION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINA-TIONS” on page 63.)

6

16


4. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE


There are 11 different methods tosearch destinations. (See “DESTI-NATION SEARCH” on page 62.)

Page 1

Page 2

Touch “Go to ”.

The navigation system performs a searchfor the route.

Touch “OK”, and start driving.

Routes other than the one recommendedcan also be selected. (See “STARTINGROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 81.)Guidance to the destination is displayedon the screen and can be heard via voiceguidance.

1

2

3

4

17


1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

5. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION


Touch “Go Home”.

“Go Home” can be used if your home ad-dress has been registered. (To registerhome, see “REGISTERING HOME” onpage 103.)Your home address is set as the destina-tion. The navigation system performs asearch for the route.

Touch “OK”, and start driving.

Routes other than the one recommendedcan also be selected. (See “STARTINGROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 81.)Guidance to the destination is displayedon the screen and can be heard via voiceguidance.

1

2

3

18

2. FUNCTION INDEX

1. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX

Map

Route guidance

Displaying maps Page

Viewing the map screen 10

Displaying the current position 35

Viewing the current position vicinity map 36

Changing the scale 43

Changing the map orientation 45

Displaying Points of Interest 98

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 90

Selecting the map mode 40

Deleting map screen buttons 123

Displaying traffic information 330

Searching destinations Page

Searching the destination 62

Changing the selected search area 62

Operating the map location of the selected destination 81

Before starting route guidance Page

Setting the destination 81

Viewing alternative routes 82

Starting route guidance 81

Before starting or during route guidance Page

Viewing the route 81

Adding destinations 91

Changing the route 93

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 90

2. FUNCTION INDEX

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

19

Useful functions

During route guidance Page

Pausing route guidance 97

Adjusting route guidance volume 57

Deleting the destination 92

Displaying the entire route map 94

Address book Page

Registering address book entries 107

Marking icons on the map 109

Information Page

Displaying vehicle maintenance 127

Hands-free system (for cellular phone) Page

Initiating Bluetooth® 140

Making a call on a Bluetooth® phone 151

Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® phone 158

Voice command system Page

Operating the system with your voice 298

20

3. QUICK REFERENCE

1. “Destination” SCREEN

The “Destination” screen enables a destination search. Press the “DEST” button to dis-play the “Destination” screen.


“Address” Touch to input a house number and the street ad-dress using the input keys. 64

“Point of Interest” Touch to select one of the POIs that have alreadybeen stored in the system’s database. 67, 355

“Destination Assist”

Touch to select to provide you with live assistancefinding destinations via the Lexus Enform withSafety Connect response center.

74, 353

“Previous Destinations”

Touch to select a destination from any of the last100 previously set destinations and from the pre-vious starting point.

74

“Del.Dest.” Touch to delete set destinations. 80

3. QUICK REFERENCE

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

21

“Address Book”

Touch the desired location from a registered en-try in “Address book”. (To register address bookentries, see “REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOKENTRIES” on page 108.)

75

“Emergency”Touch to select one of the 4 categories of emer-gency service points that have already beenstored in the system’s database.

75

“Intersection & Freeway”

Touch to enter the names of 2 intersecting streetsor a freeway (interstate) entrance or exit. This ishelpful if only the general vicinity, not the specificaddress, is known.

76

“Map” Touch to enable setting a destination by specify-ing a location on the map screen. 79

“Coordinates” Touch to enter latitude and longitude coordinates. 79

Preset destina-tion buttons

Touch to select one of the 5 preset destinationpoints as a destination. If a preset destination pointhas not been registered, a message will be dis-played asking if it is desirable to set a destination tothe preset screen button. (To register a presetdestination, see “REGISTERING PRESET DES-TINATIONS” on page 105.)

63

“Go Home”

Touch to select your personal home address with-out having to enter the address each time. If ahome address has not been registered, a messagewill be displayed and the setting screen will auto-matically appear. (To register home, see “REGIS-TERING HOME” on page 103.)

63


22

3. QUICK REFERENCE

2. “Setup” SCREEN

The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set. Press the “SETUP” button to dis-play the “Setup” screen.

3. QUICK REFERENCE

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

23


“General” Touch to change the selected language, opera-tion sound, automatic screen change settings, etc. 46

“Voice” Touch to set the voice guidance settings. 56

“Navigation”Touch to set home, preset destinations, addressbook, areas to avoid, etc. or to delete previousdestinations.

102

“Display” Touch to adjust the contrast and brightness of thescreens, turn the display off, etc. 33

“Vehicle” Touch to set vehicle information such as mainte-nance information. 127

“Other” Touch to set Lexus Insider, XM Sports, XMStocks and XM Fuel Prices. 333, 361

“Audio” Touch to set HD Radio™ channel and iPod set-tings. 280

“Bluetooth*” Touch to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth®

audio devices. 187

“Phone” Touch to set the phone sound, phonebook, mes-sage settings, etc. 165

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

24

3. QUICK REFERENCE

3. “Information” SCREEN

This screen can be used to display the XM satellite system, Lexus Enform, etc. Pressthe “INFO” button to display the “Information” screen.

3. QUICK REFERENCE

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

25


“Apps” Touch to display the “Apps” screen. 346, 349

“Traffic Incidents” Touch to display traffic incidents. 330

“LEXUS Insider” Touch to display the “LEXUS Insider” screen. 358

“Map Data” Touch to display map data information. 312

“XM Fuel Prices” Touch to display current fuel prices and gas sta-tion locations information. 323

“XMNavWeather” Touch to display weather information. 326

“XM Stocks” Touch to display personally selected stocks infor-mation. 320

“XM Sports” Touch to display personally selected sports teamsinformation. 317

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

2

27

10

1. INITIAL SCREEN ....................................... 28

2. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION ........ 29

3. INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION............................................ 30

4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ........................ 33SCREEN SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT ............. 33

5. MAP SCREEN OPERATION ............... 35

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY..................... 35

SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION.................... 36

SWITCHING THE SCREENS ............................ 40

MAP SCALE................................................................. 43

FOOT PRINT MAP ................................................... 44

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP.......................... 45

STANDARD MAP ICONS .................................. 45

1. GENERAL SETTINGS.............................. 46

SCREENS FOR GENERAL SETTINGS......... 46

2. VOICE SETTINGS..................................... 56

SCREEN FOR VOICE SETTINGS .................. 56

1 BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2 SETUP

BASIC FUNCTION

28

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

1. INITIAL SCREEN

1 When the “ENGINE START STOP”switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-TION ON mode, the initial screen willbe displayed and the system will beginoperating.

After a few seconds, the “CAUTION”screen will be displayed.

After about 5 seconds, the “CAUTION”screen automatically switches to the mapscreen. (If a button other than the “MAP/VOICE” button is pressed, the function’scorresponding screen will be displayed.)

Images shown on the initial screen can bechanged to suit individual preferences.(See page 51.)

CAUTION

●When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running, always apply the parkingbrake for safety.

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

This system reminds users when to re-place certain parts or components andshows dealer information (if registered)on the screen.When the vehicle reaches a previouslyset driving distance or date specified fora scheduled maintenance check, the“Maintenance Reminder” screen will bedisplayed when the navigation system isturned on.

This screen goes off if the screen is notoperated for several seconds.To prevent this screen from being dis-

played again, touch “Do Not DisplayThis Message Again”.To register maintenance information, see

“MAINTENANCE” on page 127.

29


2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION

This system is operated mainly by thebuttons on the screen. (Referred to asscreen buttons in this manual.)

When a screen button is touched, a beepsounds. (To set the beep sound, see page46.)

NOTICE

●To prevent damaging the screen, lightlytouch the screen buttons with your finger.

●Do not use objects other than your fingerto touch the screen.

●Wipe off fingerprints using a glass clean-ing cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners toclean the screen, as they may damage thetouch screen.

INFORMATION

●If the system does not respond to touch-ing a screen button, move your fingeraway from the screen and then touch itagain.

●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be oper-ated.

●The displayed image may become darkerand moving images may be slightly dis-torted when the screen is cold.

●In extremely cold conditions, the mapmay not be displayed and the data inputby a user may be deleted. Also, thescreen buttons may be harder than usualto depress.

●When you look at the screen throughpolarized material such as polarized sun-glasses, the screen may be dark and hardto see. If so, look at the screen from differ-ent angles, adjust the screen settings onthe “Display” screen or take off your sun-glasses.

30


3. INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION

1 Touch “A-Z” to display the alphabetkeys.

2 Touch the keys directly to enter lettersor numbers.

: Touch to erase one character. Touchand hold to continue erasing characters.

On certain letter entry screens, letters canbe entered in upper or lower case.

1 Touch “Other” to display symbol keys.

2 Touch the symbol keys directly to entersymbols.

: Touch to erase one symbol. Touchand hold to continue erasing symbols.

When searching for an address orname, or entering data, letters and num-bers can be input via the screen.

Keyboard layout can be changed. (Seepage 50.)

TO INPUT LETTERS AND NUMBERS

Icon Function

Touch to enter in lower case.

Touch to enter in upper case.

TO INPUT SYMBOLS

31


2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

1 Touch “OK” to search for an address ora name.

Matching items from the database arelisted even if the entered address or nameis incomplete.The list will be displayed automatically if the

maximum number of characters is enteredor the number of matching items is 5 orless.

TO DISPLAY THE LIST

INFORMATION

●The number of matching items is shownon the right side of the screen. If the num-ber of matching items is more than 999,the system displays “” on the screen.

LIST SCREEN OPERATION

When a list is displayed, use the appro-priate screen button to scroll throughthe list.

Icon Function

Touch to skip to the next or previ-ous page.Touch and hold or to scrollthrough the displayed list.

This indicates the displayedscreen’s position.

If appears to the right of an itemname, the complete name is toolong to display.Touch to scroll to the end of thename.Touch to move to the beginningof the name.

32


1 Touch “Sort”.

2 Touch the desired sorting criteria.

SORTING

The order of a list displayed on thescreen can be rearranged.

Screen button Function

“Distance”Touch to sort in order ofdistance from the currentposition.

“Date” Touch to sort in order ofdate.

“Category” Touch to sort in order ofcategory.

“Icon” Touch to sort in order oficon.

“Name” Touch to sort in order ofname.

“Brand”Touch to sort in order ofbrand name. (XM func-tions)

“Price” Touch to sort in order ofprice. (XM functions)

33


2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT

1 Press the “SETUP” button.

2 Touch “Display”.

Adjusting the screen display

“Camera”: Touch to adjust the image thecamera displays.Adjusting the image the camera displays

“Map·Menu”: Touch to return to thescreen display settings.

The contrast and brightness of thescreen display and the image the cam-era displays can be adjusted. The displaycan also be turned off, and/or changedto either day or night mode. (For infor-mation regarding audio/video screenadjustment, see “AUDIO SCREENADJUSTMENT” on page 234.)

SCREEN SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT

ADJUSTING SCREEN DISPLAY AND CAMERA SETTINGS

34


1 Touch “ ” or “ ” to select the desiredfunction (“Contrast” or “Brightness”).

2 Touch the desired screen button to ad-just contrast and brightness.

3 After adjusting the screen, touch “OK”.The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is

touched. To turn the screen back on, pressany button. The selected screen appears.

1 To display the screen in day mode, evenwith the headlight switch on, touch “DayMode”.

In the following conditions, the displayscondition is not changed to night modeeven if headlight switch is turned on:• The instrument panel light control switch

is adjusted full brightness.• The vehicle is in a bright area, such as out-

side in direct sunlight.

CONTRAST AND BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT

The contrast and brightness of thescreen can be adjusted according to thebrightness of your surroundings. Thedisplay can also be turned off.


“Contrast” “+” Touch to strengthen thecontrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-” Touch to weaken thecontrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+” Touch to brighten thescreen.

“Brightness” “-” Touch to darken thescreen.

CHANGING BETWEEN DAY AND NIGHT MODE

Depending on the position of the head-light switch, the screen changes to dayor night mode.

INFORMATION

●If the screen is set to day mode with theheadlight switch turned on, this conditionis memorized even with the engineturned off.

35


2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

5. MAP SCREEN OPERATION

The current position mark ( ) appears inthe center or bottom center of the mapscreen.A street name will appear on the bottom of

the screen, depending on the scale of themap ( ).The screen can be returned to this map

screen that shows the current position atany time, from any screen by pressing the“MAP/VOICE” button.

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY

When starting the navigation system,the current position is displayed first.This screen displays the current positionand a map of the surrounding area.

To correct the current position manually,see page 124.

INFORMATION

●While driving, the current position markis fixed on the screen and the map moves.

●The current position is automatically setas the vehicle receives signals from theGPS (Global Positioning System). If thecurrent position is not correct, it is auto-matically corrected after the vehiclereceives signals from the GPS.

●After battery disconnection, or on a newvehicle, the current position may not becorrect. As soon as the system receivessignals from the GPS, the correct currentposition is displayed.

36


Use the scroll feature to move the desiredpoint to the center of the screen for lookingat a point on the map that is different fromthe current position. If a finger touches and holds the map

screen, it will continue scrolling in thatdirection until the finger is removed.A street name, city name, etc. of the

touched point will be shown, depending onthe scale of the map ( ). Distance fromthe current position to will also beshown ( ).

1 Touch “Enter ”.

The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “STARTINGROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 81.)

SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION

When any point on the map is touched,that point moves to the center of thescreen and is shown by the cursor mark( ).

After the screen is scrolled, the mapremains centered at the selected locationuntil another function is activated. Thecurrent position mark will continue tomove along your actual route and maymove off the screen. When the “MAP/VOICE” button is pressed, the currentposition mark returns to the center of thescreen and the map moves as the vehicleproceeds along the designated route.When the scroll feature is used, the cur-

rent position mark may disappear fromthe screen. Press the “MAP/VOICE”button to display the current position onthe map screen.

TO SET THE CURSOR POSITION AS A DESTINATION

A specific point on the map can be set asa destination using the scroll function.

37


2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

1 Touch “Mark”.

2 This screen is displayed.

The registered point is shown by on themap.

To display information about an icon, setthe cursor on it.

■ POI INFORMATION

1 Touch “Info”.

TO REGISTER THE CURSOR POSITION AS AN ADDRESS BOOK ENTRY

Address book entry registration enableseasy access to a specific point.

To change the icon or name, etc., see“EDITING ADDRESS BOOKENTRIES” on page 108.

INFORMATION

●Up to 100 address book entries can beregistered. If there is an attempt to regis-ter more than 100 address book entries,an error message will appear.

TO SEE INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET

When the cursor is set on a POI icon, thename and “Info” are displayed at the topof the screen.

38


2 Information such as the name, address,position and phone number are dis-played.

■ ADDRESS BOOK ENTRY INFOR-MATION

1 Touch “Info”.


If “Enter ” is touched, the cursor posi-tion will be set as a destination. If a destination has already been set, “Go

Directly” and “Add to Route” will be dis-played.

“Go Directly”: Touch to delete the exist-ing destination(s) and set a new one.“Add to Route”: Touch to add a destina-tion.To register this POI as an address book

entry, touch “Mark”. (See “REGISTER-ING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES” onpage 108.) If is touched, the registered

phone number can be called.The desired POI can be displayed on the

map screen. (See “DISPLAY POIICONS” on page 98.)

When the cursor is set on an addressbook entry icon, the name and “Info” aredisplayed at the top of the screen.

39


2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

■ DESTINATION INFORMATION

1 Touch “Info”.


To delete a destination, touch “Delete”.

If “Enter ” is touched, the cursor posi-tion will be set as a destination. If a destination has already been set, “Go

Directly” and “Add to Route” will be dis-played.

“Go Directly”: Touch to delete the exist-ing destination(s) and set a new one.“Add to Route”: Touch to add a destina-tion.To edit an address book entry, touch

“Edit”. (See “EDITING ADDRESSBOOK ENTRIES” on page 108.)To delete an address book entry, touch

“Delete”. If is touched, the registered

phone number can be called.

When the cursor is set on a destinationicon, the name and “Info” are displayedon the top of the screen.

If is touched, the registeredphone number can be called.

40


■ XM NavTraffic® TEXT INFORMA-TION

1 Touch “Info”.

2 Traffic information will be displayed onthe screen.

To display detailed traffic event information,touch “Detail”.

1 Touch “Map Mode”.

2 Touch the screen buttons to select thedesired configuration.

Depending on the conditions, certainscreen configuration buttons cannot beselected.

When the XM NavTraffic® icon on themap screen is touched, the XMNavTraffic® information bar will appearon the upper part of the screen.

SWITCHING THE SCREENS

Any of the screen configurations can beselected.

41


2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

■ MAP ONLY

The screen shows the single map.

■ AUDIO

Information on the current radio station ortrack is displayed.


“Map Only”Touch to display the singlemap screen. (See page41.)

“Turn List” Touch to display the turnlist screen. (See page 86.)

“Intersection”

Touch to display the inter-section guidance screenor the guidance screen onthe freeway. (See page85.)

“Audio” Touch to display the audioscreen. (See page 41.)

“Other Information”

Touch to display the fol-lowing 4 screen configu-rations: “Dual map”,“Compass”, “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” and “FreewayExit List”.

“Dual map”Touch to display the dualmap screen. (See page42.)

“Compass”Touch to display the com-pass mode screen. (Seepage 43.)

“Turn-by-Turn Arrow”

Touch to display the turn-by-turn arrow screen. (Seepage 86.)

“Freeway Exit List”

Touch to display the free-way exit list screen. (Seepage 84.)

SCREEN CONFIGURATIONS

This is a regular map screen.

While on a different screen, touching“Map Only” will display the single mapscreen.

The audio screen and the map screenare displayed.

If a different screen is displayed, touch“Audio” on the “Map Mode” screen.For audio system operation, refer to

“AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERA-TION”. (See page 202.)

42


■ DUAL MAP

This screen shows the dual map. The mapon the left is the main map.

■ EDITING RIGHT MAP

1 Touch the desired screen button.

The following procedures can be per-formed on this screen:

2 Touch “OK” when editing is completed.The screen returns to the dual map screen.

The map screen can be split into two.

While on a different screen, touching“Dual map” will display the dual mapscreen.

The right side map can be edited bytouching any point on the right side map.

No. Function

Changing the orientation of the map

Displaying POI icons

Showing XM NavTraffic® information (See page 331.)

Displaying eDestination icons (Seepage 357.)

Changing the map scale

43


2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

■ COMPASS

Information about the destination, currentposition and a compass is displayed on thescreen.

1 Touch or to change the scaleof the map screen.

The scale bar and indicator at the bottom ofthe screen indicate the map scale menu.The scale range is from 150 ft. (50 m) to250 miles (400 km).

Touch and hold or to continuechanging the scale of the map screen.The scale of the map screen can be

changed by touching the scale bar directly.This function is not available while driving.

The current position is indicated with acompass.

While on a different screen, touching“Compass” will display the compassmode screen.

INFORMATION

●The destination mark is displayed in thedirection of the destination. When driv-ing, refer to the longitude and latitudecoordinates, and the compass, to makesure that the vehicle is headed in thedirection of the destination.

●When the vehicle travels out of the cover-age area, the guidance screen changes tothe compass mode screen.

MAP SCALE

INFORMATION

●The map scale is displayed under thenorth-up or heading-up symbol at the topleft of the screen.

●When the map scale is at the maximumrange of 250 miles (400 km), is notshown. When the map scale is at the min-imum range of 150 ft. (50 m), is notshown. In areas where the foot print mapis available the map scale changes from

to when at the minimumrange.

44


1 To display the foot print map, touch.

To delete the foot print map display, touch.

1 Touch “Info” while the foot print map isdisplayed.

Details of POIs in some buildings may bedisplayed.For detailed POI information, touch the

building name. Details of the touched POIscan be seen.

FOOT PRINT MAP

For the area which is covered by the footprint map (Some areas in the followingcities: Detroit, Chicago, N.Y., L.A), youcan switch to the foot print map on ascale of 75 ft. (25 m).

TO SWITCH TO THE FOOT PRINT MAP

changes into when the map isscaled down to 150 ft. (50 m).

INFORMATION

●If the map or the current position ismoved to the area which is not coveredby the foot print map, the screen scaleautomatically changes to 150 ft. (50 m).

●On the foot print map, a one way street is

displayed by .●It is not possible to perform scrolling on

the foot print map while driving.

Building footprints in the database werecreated and provided byMAPMASTER.

TO DISPLAY BUILDING INFORMATION

Information is available only for build-ings for which information is recordedon the map data.

45


2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

1 Touch or .

North-up screen

Heading-up screen

: North-up symbolRegardless of the direction of vehicle travel,north is always up.

: Heading-up symbolThe direction of vehicle travel is always up.

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP

The orientation of the map can bechanged from north-up to heading-upby touching the orientation symbol atthe top left of the screen.

Both the north-up and heading-up sym-bols display the vehicles direction as aletter (e.g. N for north).

STANDARD MAP ICONS

Icon Name

Island

Park

Industry

Business facility

Airport

Military

University

Hospital

Stadium

Shopping mall

Golf

46

2. SETUP

1. GENERAL SETTINGS


2 Touch “General”.

3 Touch the items to be set.

4 Touch “Save”.

On this screen, the following functions canbe performed:

Used for language selection and the on/off settings of operation sounds and au-tomatic screen change, etc.

SCREENS FOR GENERAL SETTINGS

47

2. SETUP

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N


2 Touch “General” on the “Setup” screen.

3 Touch “System Time”.

No. Function

Touch to change the time zone andselect “On” or “Off” for daylight sav-ing time. (See “SYSTEM TIME SET-TINGS” on page 47.)

Touch to change the language. (See“SELECTING A LANGUAGE” onpage 49.)

Touch to change the distance unit.(See “UNIT OF MEASUREMENT”on page 49.)

Touch to turn the sound beeps “On”or “Off”.

Touch to change the screen buttoncolor. (See “SELECTING A BUT-TON COLOR” on page 50.)

Touch to change the keyboard lay-out. (See “SELECTING A KEY-BOARD LAYOUT” on page 50.)

Touch to customize the startup im-age. (See “CHANGING THESTARTUP IMAGE” on page 51.)

Touch to customize the screen off im-age. (See “CHANGING THESCREEN OFF IMAGE” on page53.)

Touch to set automatic screen chang-es from the audio/air conditioningcontrol screen to the previous screento “On” or “Off”. If “On” is selected,the screen will automatically return tothe previous screen from the audio/air conditioning control screen afterno operations have been performedfor 20 seconds.

Touch to delete personal data. (See“DELETING PERSONAL DATA”on page 54.)

Touch to update program versions.For details, contact your Lexus deal-er.

Touch to update gracenote databaseversions. For details, contact yourLexus dealer.

SYSTEM TIME SETTINGS

Used for changing time zones and theon/off settings of daylight saving time.

No. Function

48

2. SETUP



5 Touch “Save”.

■ TIME ZONE



3 Touch “System Time” on the “GeneralSettings” screen.

4 Touch “Time Zone”.

5 Touch the desired time zone.

If “Other” is touched, the zone can beadjusted manually. Touch “+” or “-” to adjustthe time zone and then touch “OK”.

6 Touch “Save”.

No. Function

Touch to change the time zone. (See“TIME ZONE” on page 48.)

Touch to select “On” or “Off” fordaylight saving time.

A time zone can be selected and GMTcan be set.

49

2. SETUP

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N



3 Touch “Language”.


5 Touch “Yes”.The previous screen will be displayed.

6 Touch “Save”.



3 Touch “Unit of Measurement”.

4 Touch “km” or “mile”.

The previous screen will be displayed.

5 Touch “Save”.

SELECTING A LANGUAGE

The language can be changed.

UNIT OF MEASUREMENT

Distance unit can be changed.

This function is available only in Englishor Spanish. To change language, see“SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on page49.

50

2. SETUP



3 Touch “Button Color”.

4 Touch the desired screen button color.


5 Touch “Save”.



3 Touch “Keyboard Layout”.

4 Touch “ABC” or “QWERTY” of “Key-board Layout” to change the keyboardlayout.


5 Touch “Save”.

SELECTING A BUTTON COLOR

The color of the screen buttons can bechanged.

SELECTING A KEYBOARD LAYOUT

Keyboard layout can be changed.

51

2. SETUP

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

■ LAYOUT TYPE

“ABC” type

“QWERTY” type

CHANGING THE STARTUP IMAGE

When the “ENGINE START STOP”switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-TION ON mode, the initial screen willbe displayed.An image can be copied from a USBmemory and used as the startup image.(For information regarding the startupimage, see “INITIAL SCREEN” on page28.)

INFORMATION

●When saving the images to a USB, namethe folder that the startup image is savedto “StartupImage” and name the folderthat the screen off image is saved to“DisplayOffImage”. If these folder namesare not used, the navigation system can-not download the images. (The foldernames are case sensitive.)

●The images file extension is JPG orJPEG.

●The images file name, including the fileextension, can be up to 32 characters.

●Image files of 10 MB or less can be saved.●Up to 3 images can be downloaded.

52

2. SETUP

■ TRANSFERRING DATA

1 Open the cover and connect a USBmemory.

Turn on the power of the USB memory if itis not turned on.

2 Close the console box.



5 Touch “Customize Startup Image”.

6 Touch “Transfer”.

7 Touch “Yes”.

■ SETTING THE STARTUP IMAGE



3 Touch “Customize Startup Image” onthe “General Settings” screen.

4 Touch the desired image.

5 Touch “Save”.

■ DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAG-ES



3 Touch “Customize Startup Image” onthe “General Settings” screen.

4 Touch “Delete All”.

5 Touch “Yes”.

53

2. SETUP

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

■ TRANSFERRING DATA






5 Touch “Customize Screen Off Image”.


7 Touch “Yes”.

CHANGING THE SCREEN OFF IMAGE

Touch “Screen Off” to turn off thescreen. An image can be copied from aUSB memory and can be set to displaywhen “Screen Off” is touched. (Formore information on “Screen Off”, see“SCREEN ADJUSTMENT” on page33.)

54

2. SETUP

■ SETTING THE SCREEN OFF IM-AGE



3 Touch “Customize Screen Off Image”on the “General Settings” screen.

4 Touch the desired image.

5 Touch “Save”.

■ DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAG-ES



3 Touch “Customize Screen Off Image”on the “General Settings” screen.

4 Touch “Delete All”.

5 Touch “Yes”.



3 Touch “Delete Personal Data”.

4 Touch “Delete”.

5 Touch “Yes”.

DELETING PERSONAL DATA

55

2. SETUP

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

The following personal data can be deletedor returned to their default settings:• Maintenance conditions• Maintenance information off setting• Address book• Areas to avoid• Previous points• Route guidance• Route trace• Phonebook data• Call history data• Speed dial data• Bluetooth® phone data• Phone sound settings• Phone display settings• Message settings• Audio/video setting• Bluetooth® audio setting• Startup image data • Screen off image data• Downloaded Apps

INFORMATION

●This function is not available while driving.

56

2. SETUP

2. VOICE SETTINGS


2 Touch “Voice”.


4 Touch “Save”.


Voice guidance etc. can be set. SCREEN FOR VOICE SETTINGS

57

2. SETUP

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

To reset all setup items, touch “Default”.


2 Touch “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.

3 Select the desired level by touching theappropriate number.

If voice guidance is not needed, touch“Off” to disable the feature.

4 Touch “Save”.

No. Function

The voice guidance volume can beadjusted or switched off. (See“VOICE VOLUME” on page 57.)

Voice guidance during route guid-ance can be set to “On” or “Off”.

Voice guidance during audio/videoand/or air conditioning system usecan be set to “On” or “Off”.

Voice recognition prompts can beset to “On” or “Off”. This setting canalso be changed on the “ShortcutMenu” screen. (See page 298.)

When “On” is selected, the audio/video and air conditioning systemscan be operated using voice com-mands.

When using the traffic informationfunction, voice guidance can be set to“On” or “Off”. (See “TRAFFIC INCI-DENT WARNING” on page 58.)

When using the XM NavWeather™function, the severe weather warningcan be set to “On” or “Off”.

VOICE VOLUME

The voice guidance volume can be ad-justed or switched off.

58

2. SETUP


2 Touch “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.

3 Touch “On” of “Traffic Incident Warn-ing”.

4 Touch “Save”.

TRAFFIC INCIDENT WARNING

Traffic congestion information can bereceived via voice guidance while beingguided to the desired destination.

INFORMATION

●When the “Traffic Information” indicatoris dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic IncidentWarning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”will not operate. (See page 331.)

59

2. SETUP

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

60

1. DESTINATION SEARCH........................ 62

SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA .................. 62

DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME............. 63

DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINATIONS..................................................... 63

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Address” .................................................................... 64

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Point of Interest” ..................................................... 67

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Destination Assist”................................................. 74

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Previous Destinations”......................................... 74

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Address Book” ........................................................ 75

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Emergency”.............................................................. 75

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Intersection & Freeway”...................................... 76

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Map” ............... 79

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Coordinates”............................................................ 79

DELETING SET DESTINATIONS.................... 80

2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ........ 81

1 DESTINATION SEARCH

3

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

3

61

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN ............ 84

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS ................................................. 87

3. DISTANCE AND TIME TO DESTINATION ........................................ 90

4. SETTING AND DELETING DESTINATIONS....................................... 91

ADDING DESTINATIONS ................................... 91

REORDERING DESTINATIONS....................... 91

DELETING DESTINATIONS .............................. 92

5. SETTING ROUTE ...................................... 93

DETOUR SETTING .................................................. 93

ROUTE OVERVIEW ............................................... 94

ROUTE PREFERENCE.......................................... 95

PAUSING AND RESUMING GUIDANCE ............................................................. 97

SHOW ON MAP...................................................... 98

ROUTE TRACE ......................................................... 101

1. NAVIGATION SETTINGS ................... 102

SETTING UP THE “Home” .................................. 103

SETTING UP THE “Preset Destinations” ...... 105

SETTING UP THE “Address Book” ................. 107

SETTING UP THE “Areas to Avoid”................. 112

DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS.................................................... 116

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS .................................................. 117

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS................................................................. 118

2. VEHICLE SETTINGS .............................. 127

MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 127

1. LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................... 133

2 ROUTE GUIDANCE 3 ADDRESS BOOK

4 SETUP

5 GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

62

1. DESTINATION SEARCH


1 Press the “DEST” button.


One of 11 different methods can be used tosearch a destination. (See pages 63through 79.)

1 Touch “Change State/Province” todisplay a list of the states/provinces/ter-ritories of the United States and Cana-da.

2 Touch the desired state (province).


INFORMATION

●When searching a destination, theresponse to the screen button may beslow.

SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA

The selected state (province) can bechanged to set a destination from adifferent state (province) by using“Address”, “Point of Interest” or“Intersection & Freeway”.

For map database information andupdates, see “MAP DATABASE VER-SION AND COVERAGE AREA” onpage 312. If a state (province) has not been

selected yet, “Select State/Province” isdisplayed.

63


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM


2 Touch “Go Home”.

Your home address is set as the destination.The navigation system performs a searchfor the route.

3 Touch “OK”.


2 Touch any of the preset destination but-tons (1-5).

The selected preset destination point is setas the destination. The navigation systemperforms a search for the route. (See“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” onpage 81.)

3 Touch “OK”.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME

To use this function, it is necessary to set ahome address. (To register home, seepage 103.)

INFORMATION

●If a home address has not been regis-tered, a message confirming if it is desir-able to set a home will be displayed, andthe setting screen will appear.

●Guidance starts from the current positionto the set home address if “OK” istouched even while driving.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINATIONS

To use this function, it is necessary to setpreset destinations to the preset screenbuttons (1-5). (See “REGISTERINGPRESET DESTINATIONS” on page105.)

INFORMATION

●If a preset destination point has not beenregistered, a message confirming if it isdesirable to set a preset destination willbe displayed, and the setting screen willappear.

●Guidance starts from the current positionto the preset destination point if “OK” istouched even while driving.

64



2 Touch “Address” on the “Destination”screen.

3 Touch the desired search method.



3 Touch “City”.

4 Input a city name.

5 Touch the screen button of the desiredcity name from the displayed list.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Address”

There are 2 methods to search a desti-nation by address:(a) Search by city(b) Search by street address

SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH

65


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

6 Input the street name and touch “OK”.

7 When the desired street name is found,touch the corresponding screen button.

When the desired street name is selected,the “Confirm Destination” screen may bedisplayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Con-firm Destination” screen, the navigationsystem performs a search for the route.(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”on page 81.)

8 Input a house number.

If the same address exists in more than 1city, the current screen changes to theaddress list screen.

■ SEARCHING FROM THE LAST 5CITIES

1 Touch “Last 5 Cities”.


The current screen changes to thescreen for inputting a street name. (See“SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH” onpage 64.)

INFORMATION

●If the navigation system has never beenused, this function will not be available.

66




3 Touch “Street Address”.

4 Touch numbers directly on the screento input the house number.

After inputting the house number, touch“OK” to display the screen for inputting thestreet name.

5 Input the street name and touch “OK”.

6 When the desired street name is found,touch the corresponding screen button.

When the desired street name is selected,the “Confirm Destination” screen may bedisplayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Con-firm Destination” screen, the navigationsystem performs a search for the route.(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”on page 81.) If the same address exists in more than 1

city, a screen requesting the city name to beinput or selected will be displayed.

7 Input a city name.


SEARCH BY STREET ADDRESS

67


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM1 Press the “DEST” button.

2 Touch “Point of Interest” on the “Desti-nation” screen.

3 Touch the desired search method.



3 Touch “Name” on the “Point of Interest”screen.

4 Input the name of the POI.

5 Touch the screen button of the desireddestination.

When the desired destination is selected,the “Confirm Destination” screen may bedisplayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Con-firm Destination” screen, the navigationsystem performs a search for the route.(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”on page 81.)When inputting the name of a specific POI,

and there are 2 or more sites with the samename, the list screen is displayed.

INFORMATION

●A street name can be searched usingonly the body part of its name.

●For example: S WESTERN AVE• A search can be performed by inputting

“S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE”or “WESTERN”.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Point of Interest”

There are 4 methods to search a desti-nation by Points of Interest:(a) Search by name(b) Search by category(c) Search by phone #(d) Search by eDestination

SEARCH BY “Name”

68



If the same name exists in more than 1 city, asearch can be performed more easily using“City” or “Category”. (See “SELECTINGA CITY TO SEARCH” on page 64 and“SELECTING FROM THE CATEGO-RIES” on page 69.)

■ SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH

1 Touch “City”.

2 Input the city name.

To cancel the city setting, touch “Any City”.


The desired POI can be displayed on themap screen. (See “DISPLAY POIICONS” on page 98.)

INFORMATION

●To search for a facility name using multi-ple search words, put a space betweeneach word.

69


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

■ SELECTING FROM THE CATEGO-RIES

1 Touch “Category”.

2 Touch the screen button of the desiredcategory.

If the desired POI category is on thescreen, touch its screen button to display adetailed list of the POI category. If the desired POI category is not on the

screen, touch “List All Categories” to listall POI categories.

When the desired category is touched, thePOI name list screen is displayed.



3 Touch “Category”.


On this screen, the following operationscan be performed:

SEARCH BY “Category”

The destination can be set by touchingthe search point and the POI category.

No. Function

Touch to set the search point fromnear the current position.

Touch to set the search point fromalong the selected route.

Touch to set the search point fromnear a city center.

Touch to set the search point fromnear a destination.

70


■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINTFROM NEAR HERE

1 Touch “Near Here”.The search point is set at the current posi-

tion, and the “POI Category” screen will bedisplayed. (See page 72.)

■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINTFROM ALONG MY ROUTE

1 Touch “Along My Route”.The search point is set and the “POI Cate-

gory” screen will be displayed. (See page72.)

■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINTFROM NEAR CITY CENTER

1 Touch “Near a City Center in XX*”.

2 Input the city center name.

3 Touch the screen button of the desiredcity center name.

The search point is set and the “POI Cate-gory” screen will be displayed. (See page72.)*: XX represents the touched search area

name.

INFORMATION

●The names of POIs located withinapproximately 200 miles (320 km) fromthe selected search point can be dis-played.

71


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

■ SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5CITIES

1 Touch “Near a City Center in XX*”.

2 Touch “Last 5 Cities”.

3 Touch the screen button of the desiredcity center name.

The search point is set and the “POI Cate-gory” screen will be displayed. (See page72.)*: XX represents the selected search area

name.

■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINTFROM NEAR A DESTINATION

1 Touch “Near a Destination”.


The search point is set and the “POI Cate-gory” screen will be displayed. (See page72.)

72


■ TO SEARCH FOR POIs NEAR THESEARCH POINT

1 Touch the desired POI category.

If the desired POI category is not on thescreen, touch “List All Categories” to listall POI categories. If “Favorite POI Categories” is touched, a

search can be performed using the 6 POIsthat have been previously set. For moredetails, see “POI CATEGORY CHANGE(SELECT POI ICONS)” on page 122.

2 Touch the desired POI category fromthe list.

3 Touch the screen button of the desireditem.

When the desired item is selected, the“Confirm Destination” screen may be dis-played. If “Go” is touched on the “ConfirmDestination” screen, the navigation systemperforms a search for the route. (See“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” onpage 81.)

When the search point is set, the “POICategory” screen will be displayed.

73


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM



3 Touch “Phone #” on the “Point of Inter-est” screen.

4 Input a phone number.

5 After inputting a phone number, touch“OK”.

When a phone number is input, the “Con-firm Destination” screen may be displayed.If “Go” is touched on the “Confirm Destina-tion” screen, the navigation system per-forms a search for the route. (See“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” onpage 81.) If there is more than 1 site with the same

number, the following screen will be dis-played.



3 Touch “eDestination” on the “Point ofInterest” screen.

With the eDestination feature, you can goonline, via the Lexus.com owner’s Web site,to select and organize destinations of yourchoice and then wirelessly send them toyour vehicle’s navigation system. Up to200 locations can be stored online andaccessed or updated at any time. Locationscan be organized into up to 20 folders.(See “eDestination” on page 355.)

SEARCH BY “Phone #” To set an address book entry as a desti-nation using the phone number, the num-ber must already be registered with theaddress book entry. (See page 107.)

INFORMATION

●If there is no match for the phone numberinput, a list of identical numbers with dif-ferent area codes will be displayed.

SEARCH BY “eDestination”

74



2 Touch “Destination Assist” on the“Destination” screen.

Destination Assist provides you with liveassistance for finding destinations via theLexus Enform with Safety Connectresponse center. You can request either aspecific business, address, or ask for helplocating your desired destination by cate-gory, such as restaurants, gas stations,shopping centers or other points of interest(POI). After you tell the agent your choiceof destination, its coordinates are sent wire-lessly to your vehicle’s navigation system.(See “Destination Assist” on page 353.)


2 Touch “Previous Destinations” on the“Destination” screen.


The previous starting point and up to 100previously set destinations are displayed onthe screen.

“Delete”: Touch to delete the previous des-tination. (To delete previous destinations,see page 80.)When the desired destination is selected,

the “Confirm Destination” screen may bedisplayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Con-firm Destination” screen, the navigationsystem performs a search for the route.(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”on page 81.)

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Destination Assist”

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Previous Destinations”

The list of previous destinations can alsobe deleted by touching “Delete PreviousDest.” on the “Navigation Settings”screen when the vehicle is stopped. (See“DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINA-TIONS” on page 116.)

75


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM


2 Touch “Address Book” on the “Destina-tion” screen.

3 Touch the screen button of the desiredaddress book entry.

A list of registered address book entries isdisplayed.

“Options”: Touch to register or edit addressbook entries. (See page 108.)When the desired address book entry is

selected, the “Confirm Destination” screenmay be displayed. If “Go” is touched on the“Confirm Destination” screen, the naviga-tion system performs a search for the route.(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”on page 81.)


2 Touch “Emergency” on the secondpage of the “Destination” screen.

The display changes to a screen to selectpolice stations, dealers, hospitals or fire sta-tions.

3 Touch the desired emergency category.

The selected emergency category is dis-played.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Address Book”

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Emergency”

76



When the desired destination is selected,the “Confirm Destination” screen may bedisplayed. If “Go” is touched on the “Con-firm Destination” screen, the navigationsystem performs a search for the route.(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”on page 81.)


2 Touch “Intersection & Freeway” on thesecond page of the “Destination”screen.

3 Touch the desired method.

INFORMATION

●The navigation system does not guide inareas where route guidance is unavail-able. (See page 134.)

●The emergency function can be usedeven while driving.

●While driving, only the currently dis-played items and the items on the nextpage can be viewed.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Intersection & Freeway”

There are 2 methods to search a desti-nation by Intersection & Freeway:(a) Search by intersection(b) Search by freeway

77


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM



3 Touch “Intersection” on the “Intersec-tion & Freeway” screen.

4 Input the name of the first intersectingstreet which is located near the destina-tion to be set, and touch “OK”.


6 Input the name of the second intersect-ing street.


When the desired item is selected, the“Confirm Destination” screen may be dis-played. If “Go” is touched on the “ConfirmDestination” screen, the navigation systemperforms a search for the route. (See“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” onpage 81.)

SEARCH BY “Intersection”

INFORMATION

●If the same 2 streets cross at more than 1intersection, the screen changes and dis-plays the menu to select the city namewhere the streets intersect. Select thecity, and the map location of the selecteddestination and the route preference.(See “STARTING ROUTE GUID-ANCE” on page 81.)

78




3 Touch “Freeway Entrance / Exit” onthe “Intersection & Freeway” screen.

4 Input a freeway name.

5 Touch the screen button of the desiredfreeway.

6 Touch “Entrance” or “Exit”.

7 Input a freeway entrance or exit name,and touch “OK”.

8 Touch the screen button of the desiredentrance or exit name.

When the desired entrance or exit isselected, the “Confirm Destination” screenmay be displayed. If “Go” is touched on the“Confirm Destination” screen, the naviga-tion system performs a search for the route.(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”on page 81.)

SEARCH BY “Freeway Entrance / Exit”

INFORMATION

●Be sure to use the complete name of thefreeway or highway, including the hyphen,when entering the destination. Freewaysand interstates use an “I” (I-405). UShighways use the state designation beforethe number (CA-118).

79


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM


2 Touch “Map” on the second page of the“Destination” screen.

3 Scroll the map to the desired point.

4 Touch “Go to ”.The navigation system performs a search

for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTEGUIDANCE” on page 81.)


2 Touch “Coordinates” on the secondpage of the “Destination” screen.

3 Input the latitude and the longitude.

4 After inputting the latitude and longi-tude, touch “OK”.

When the desired screen button isselected, the “Confirm Destination” screenmay be displayed. If “Go” is touched on the“Confirm Destination” screen, the naviga-tion system performs a search for the route.(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”on page 81.)

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Map”

INFORMATION

●Guidance starts if “OK” is touched evenwhile driving. However, the cursor cannotbe moved.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Coordinates”

80



2 Touch “Del.Dest.” on the “Destination”screen.

When more than 1 destination is set, a listwill be displayed on the screen.

3 Touch the destination to be deleted.

“Delete All”: Touch to delete all destina-tions on the list.

4 Touch “Yes” to delete the destination(s).

A message appears to confirm the requestto delete. If “Yes” is touched, the data cannot be

recovered. If more than 1 destination hasbeen set, the system will recalculate theroute(s) to the set destination(s) as neces-sary. If “No” is touched, the previous screen will

be displayed.

DELETING SET DESTINATIONS

A set destination can be deleted.

Set destinations can also be deleted bytouching “Route”. (See “DELETINGDESTINATIONS” on page 92.)

81


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE


“Adjust Location”: Touch to adjust the posi-tion in smaller increments.

When an arrow facing the desired point istouched, the map scrolls in that direction.When the screen button is released, the

scrolling stops.

2 Touch “Go to ”.The system starts route search and displays

recommended routes.

3 To start guidance, touch “OK”.

When “Map” is touched on the “Con-firm Destination” screen, the mapscreen will be displayed. The map loca-tion of the selected destination can beset as a destination.

If a destination has already been set, “Goto ” and “Add to Route” will be dis-played.

“Go to ”: Touch to delete the existingdestination(s) and set a new one.“Add to Route”: Touch to add a destina-tion.“Info”: If this screen button is displayed onthe top of the screen, touch it to viewitems such as name, address, position andphone number.

No. Function

Current position

Destination point

Type of route and its distance

Distance of the entire route

Touch to display a list of the turns re-quired to reach the destination.

Touch to change the route. (Seepage 83.)

Touch the desired route from 3 pos-sible routes. (See page 82.)

82


1 Touch “3 Routes”.

2 Touch “Preferred”, “Alternate” or“Short”.

Guidance can be paused or resumed.(See “PAUSING AND RESUMINGGUIDANCE” on page 97.) If “OK” is touched until a beep sounds,

demo mode will start. Press the “MAP/VOICE” button to end demo mode.

CAUTION

● Be sure to obey traffic regulations andkeep road conditions in mind while driv-ing. If a traffic sign on the road has beenchanged, the route guidance may notindicate such changed information.

INFORMATION

●The route for returning may not be thesame as that for going.

●The route guidance to the destinationmay not be the shortest route nor a routewithout traffic congestion.

●Route guidance may not be available ifthere is no road data for the specifiedlocation.

●When setting the destination on a mapwith a scale larger than 0.5 miles (800m), the map scale changes to 0.5 miles(800 m) automatically. If this occurs, setthe destination again.

●If a destination that is not located on aroad is set, the vehicle will be guided tothe point on a road nearest to the destina-tion. The road nearest to the pointselected is set as the destination.

3 ROUTES SELECTION

No. Function

Touch to display the recommendedroute.

Touch to display the alternativeroute.

Touch to display the route that is theshortest distance to the set destina-tion.

Touch to display the informationshown below about each of the 3routes.

83


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

1 Touch “Edit Route”.


No. Function

Time necessary for the entire trip

Distance of the entire trip

Toll road

Freeway

Ferry

EDIT ROUTE

Conditions for the route to the destina-tion can be set again.

No. Function Page

Touch to add destinations. 91

Touch to delete destina-tions. 92

Touch to reorder destina-tions. 91

Touch to display the choic-es available when settingthe conditions the systemuses to determine the routeto the destination.

95

INFORMATION

●Even if the “Freeways” indicator isdimmed, the route cannot avoid includinga freeway in some cases. (See page 95.)

●If the calculated route includes a trip byferry, the route guidance shows a searoute. After you travel by ferry, the cur-rent position may be incorrect. Uponreception of GPS signals, it is automati-cally corrected.

84

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN

During route guidance, various types ofguidance screens can be displayed de-pending on conditions.

SCREEN LAYOUT

No. Function

Distance to the next turn and an ar-row indicating the turning direction

Guidance route

Current position

Distance and travel/arrival time tothe destination

Current street name

INFORMATION

●If the vehicle goes off the guidance route,the route is searched again.

●For some areas, the roads have not beencompletely digitized in our database. Forthis reason, the route guidance mayselect a road that should not be traveledon.

●When arriving at the set destination thedestination name will be displayed on thetop of the screen. Touching “Off” clearsthe display.

DURING FREEWAY DRIVING

During freeway driving, the freeway exitinformation screen will be displayed.This screen displays the distance to thenext junction/exit, or POIs in the vicinityof the freeway exit.

No./Icon Function

Distance from the current position tothe exit or junction

Exit number and junction name

Current position

POIs that are close to a freeway exit

Current street name

Touch to display the selected map ofthe exit vicinity.

Touch to scroll to farther junctions orexits.

Touch to scroll to closer junctions orexits.

Touch to display the closest 3 junc-tions or exits.

85

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

: Touch to hide the freeway guidancescreen.Touch “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/

VOICE” button, to change back to thefreeway guidance screen.

: Touch to hide the intersection guid-ance screen.Touch “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/

VOICE” button, to change back to theintersection guidance screen.

WHEN APPROACHING A FREEWAY EXIT OR JUNCTION

When the vehicle approaches an exit orjunction, the freeway guidance screenwill be displayed.

No. Function

Next street name

Current position

Distance from the current position tothe exit or junction

WHEN APPROACHING AN INTERSECTION

When the vehicle approaches an inter-section, the intersection guidancescreen will be displayed.

No. Function

Next street name

Current position

Distance to the intersection

86

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

■ TURN LIST SCREEN

1 Touch “Turn List” during guidance todisplay the turn list.

■ ARROW SCREEN

1 Touch “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” duringguidance to display the arrow screen.

OTHER SCREENS

On this screen, the list of turns on theguidance route can be viewed.

No. Function

Turn direction

Distance between turns

Next street or destination name

Current street name

On this screen, information about thenext turn on the guidance route can beviewed.

No. Function

Exit number or street name

Turn direction

Distance to the next turn

Current street name

87

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS

As the vehicle approaches an intersec-tion, or point, where maneuvering thevehicle is necessary, the system’s voiceguidance will provide various messages.

No. Voice guidance

“Proceed about 5 miles to Mainstreet.”

“In half of a mile, right turn onto Mainstreet.”

“Next right.”/“Right turn ahead.”

(Beep sound only)

INFORMATION

●The street names may not be pro-nounced correctly or clearly due to thetext-to-speech function.

●On freeways, interstates or other high-ways with higher speed limits, the voiceguidance will be made at earlier pointsthan on city streets in order to allow timeto maneuver the vehicle.

0.5 miles5 miles

No. Voice guidance

“Proceed about 4 miles to the trafficcircle.”

“In half of a mile, traffic circle aheadand then the 3rd exit onto Mainstreet.”

“The 3rd exit ahead.”

“The exit ahead.”

(Beep sound only)

4 miles0.5 miles

88

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

*: The system indicates a U-turn if the dis-tance between 2 one-way roads (of oppo-site directions) is less than 50 ft. (15 m) inresidential areas or 164 ft. (50 m) in non-residential areas.

The system announces the approach to thefinal destination.

No. Voice guidance

“In half of a mile, make a legal U-turn.”

“Make a legal U-turn ahead.”

(Beep sound only)

No. Voice guidance

“In half of a mile, your destination isahead.”

“Your destination is ahead.”

“You have arrived at your destina-tion. The route guidance is now fin-ished.”

If a voice guidance command cannot beheard, press the “MAP/VOICE” buttonto hear it again.To adjust the voice guidance volume, see

“VOICE VOLUME” on page 57.

INFORMATION

●If the system cannot determine the cur-rent position correctly (in cases of poorGPS signal reception), the voice guid-ance may be early or late.

89

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

■ ROUTES INCLUDING IPD ROADS

After it has made a route calculation, thesystem will advise the user whether IPDroads are included in the route or not.The portion of the route that covers IPD

roads is indicated by light blue.

Even when on IPD roads (roads that arenot completely digitized in our data-base), you will be guided along thesearched route via voice guidance.

No. Voice guidance

“On the way to your destination,there will be roads with incompletedata.”

“In half of a mile, left turn.”

“Next left. Upcoming roads have in-complete data. Please carefully ob-serve the local traffic restrictions, asthey may not match the navigationguidance.”

IPD roads are roads that are not yet com-pletely digitized in our database. How-ever, their geometry, name andadministrative coding are already known.

CAUTION

● Be sure to obey the traffic regulations andkeep the road condition in mind espe-cially when you are driving on IPD roads.The route guidance may not have theupdated information such as the directionof a one way street.

90

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3. DISTANCE AND TIME TO DESTINATION

1 Touch the screen button indicated bythe arrow.

2 Touch the number screen button to dis-play the desired destination.

The distance, estimated travel time andestimated arrival time from the currentposition to the selected destination are dis-played.

When the vehicle is on the guidanceroute, the distance and the estimatedtravel/arrival time to the destination aredisplayed. When the vehicle is not on theguidance route, the distance and direc-tion of the destination are displayed.When driving on the guidance routewith more than 1 destination set, the dis-tance and estimated travel/arrival timefrom the current position to each desti-nation are displayed.

Icon Function

Estimated travel time is dis-played.

Estimated arrival time is dis-played.

Touch to switch to estimated ar-rival time.

Touch to switch to estimatedtravel time.

Displayed while driving off theguidance route. The destinationdirection is indicated by an arrow.

INFORMATION

●When the vehicle is on the guidanceroute, the distance measured along theroute is displayed. Travel time and arrivaltime are calculated based on the set vehi-cle speed information. (See “DRIVINGSPEEDS” on page 119.) However, whenthe vehicle is not on the guidance route,the distance is the linear distancebetween the current position and thedestination.

91

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

4. SETTING AND DELETING DESTINATIONS

1 Touch “Route”.

2 Touch “Add”.

3 Input an additional destination in thesame way as a destination search. (See“DESTINATION SEARCH” on page62.)

4 Touch the desired “Add DestinationHere” to insert the new destination intothe route.


2 Touch “Reorder”.

3 Touch the desired destination and touch“Move Up” or “Move Down” to changethe arrival order.

4 After selecting the destinations, touch“OK”.

The system searches for the guidanceroute again, and displays the entire route.

ADDING DESTINATIONS

Destinations can be added and routescan be searched again.

REORDERING DESTINATIONS

When more than 1 destination is set, thearrival order of the destinations can bechanged.

92

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE



When more than 1 destination is set, a listwill be displayed on the screen.

3 Touch the destination to be deleted.

“Delete All”: Touch to delete all destina-tions on the list.A message appears to confirm the request

to delete.

4 Touch “Yes” to delete the destination(s). If “Yes” is touched, the data cannot be

recovered. If more than 1 destination hasbeen set, the system will recalculate theroute(s) to the set destination(s) as neces-sary. If “No” is touched, the previous screen will

be displayed.

DELETING DESTINATIONS

A set destination can be deleted.

93

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

5. SETTING ROUTE


2 Touch “Detour”.

3 Touch a screen button to select the de-sired detour distance.

“1 mile (km)”, “3 miles (km)” or “5 miles(km)”: Touch one of these screen buttons tostart the detour process. After detouring,the system returns to the original guidanceroute.“Whole Route”: Touch to make the systemcalculate an entire new route to the destina-tion.“Around Traffic”: Touch to make the systemsearch for the route based on the trafficcongestion information received from XMNavTraffic®. For details, see “XMNavTraffic®” on page 330.

DETOUR SETTING

While the route guidance is operating,the route can be changed to detouraround a section of the route where adelay is caused by road repairs, or an ac-cident, etc.

INFORMATION

●This picture shows an example of how thesystem would guide around a delaycaused by a traffic jam.

This position indicates the location of atraffic jam caused by road repairs, an ac-cident, etc.

This route indicates the detour suggest-ed by the system.

●When the vehicle is on a freeway, thedetour distance selections are 5, 15 and25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units arein km).

●The system may not be able to calculate adetour route depending on the selecteddistance and surrounding road condi-tions.

94

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE


2 Touch “Overview”.

3 The entire route from the current posi-tion to the destination is displayed.

1 Touch or to skip to the next page

of the list of roads. Touch and hold or

to scroll through the list of roads.

: This mark indicates the direction inwhich you should turn at the intersection.“Map”: The selected point is displayed onthe map screen.

ROUTE OVERVIEW

No. Function

Touch to display a list of the turns re-quired to reach the destination.

Touch to start guidance.

TURN LIST

INFORMATION

●However, not all road names in the routemay appear on the list. If a road changesits name without requiring a turn (such ason a street that runs through 2 or morecities), the name change will not appearon the list. The street names will be dis-played in order from the starting point,along with the distance to the next turn.

95

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM


2 Touch “Preferences”.

3 Touch “Preferred”, “Short” or “Alter-nate” and touch “OK”.

4 The entire route from the starting pointto the destination is displayed.

“OK”: Touch to start guidance.


ROUTE PREFERENCE

TO SELECT ROUTE TYPE

The Preferred, Short or Alternativeroute can be selected.

“Edit Route”: Touch to change a route.(See page 83.)

TO SELECT ROUTE FEATURES

A number of choices are available whensetting the conditions the system uses todetermine the route to the destination.

96

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

2 Touch “Preferences” to display condi-tions that can be selected when the sys-tem determines the route to thedestination.

3 Select the desired route preferences.

The system will avoid using routes thatinclude items whose indicators are off.

4 After selecting the desired route prefer-ence, touch “OK”.


2 Touch “Preferences”.

3 Touch “Start from Adjacent Road”.

STARTING ROUTE FROM ADJACENT ROAD

The route guidance can be started froman adjacent road.(e.g. When route guidance is set on thefreeway, but the vehicle is driven parallelalong the freeway.)

INFORMATION

●When there is no adjacent road, thisscreen button will not be displayed.

97

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM


2 Touch “Pause Guidance”.

The screen will return to the current posi-tion map without route guidance.


2 Touch “Resume Guidance”.

The map screen, with the current positiondisplayed, will be returned to.

PAUSING AND RESUMING GUIDANCE

TO PAUSE GUIDANCE

INFORMATION

●Without route guidance, “Pause Guid-ance” cannot be used.

TO RESUME GUIDANCE

98

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

1 Touch “Show on Map”.

2 Touch “Select POI” to display a partic-ular type of POI icon on the screen.

When the POI icons to be displayed on themap screen have already been set,“Change POI” is displayed.

A screen with a limited choice of POIs willbe displayed. (To change the displayed POIlist, see page 122.)

1 Select the desired POI category to dis-play POI location icons on the mapscreen.

By touching the desired POI category andthen touching “OK”, the selected POIicons are displayed on the map screen.To turn off the POI icons on the map

screen, touch “Clear”.“Other POIs”: Touch to display other POIscategories if the desired POIs cannot befound on the limited choice screen.“Find Local POI”: Touch to search for thenearest POIs. Then select one of the cate-gories. The system will list the points within20 miles (32 km). (See page 99.)

2 Touch “Other POIs” on the “SelectPOI Icons” screen.

When a POI category is selected fromeither the limited list or the complete list,the icons of those locations will be dis-played on the map screen.

SHOW ON MAP

DISPLAY POI ICONS

POI icons such as gas stations and res-taurants can be displayed on the mapscreen. Their location can also be set asa destination and used for route guid-ance.

SELECTING POI ICONS TO BE DISPLAYED

Up to 5 categories of icons can be dis-played on the map screen.

99

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3 Touch the desired POI categories.

The selected category’s icon will appear onthe top left of the screen.By touching the desired POI category and

then touching “OK”, the selected POIicons are displayed on the map screen. If the desired POI category is not on the

screen, touch “List All Categories” to listall POI categories.

Touch the desired POI categories from thelist.• The selected category icon appears on

the top left of the screen.• By touching the desired POI category

and then touching “OK”, the selectedPOI icons are displayed on the mapscreen.

• To return to the POI category selectionscreen, touch “More”.

1 Touch “Find Local POI”.

2 Touch the screen button of the desiredPOI.

The selected POIs are displayed on themap screen.

“Near...”: Touch to search for POIs near thecurrent position or along the route.

TO DISPLAY THE LOCAL POI LIST

Points of Interest that are within 20miles (32 km) of the current position willbe listed from among the selected cate-gories.

100

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

1 Directly touch the desired POI icon toset it as a destination.

The map will shift so that the icon is cen-tered on the screen and overlaps with thecursor . At this time, the distance fromthe current position is displayed on thescreen. The distance shown is measured asa straight line from the current position tothe POI.

2 When the desired POI overlaps with thecursor, touch “Enter ”.

The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination androute preference. (See “STARTINGROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 81.)


2 Touch “POI Icons”.

The “POI Icons” indicator is dimmed.The map screen will be displayed with the

POI icons hidden.To display the POI icons again, touch “POI

Icons” on the “Show on Map” screen.

No. Function

Touch to display the list of POIs nearthe current position.

Touch to display the list of POIsalong the route.

TO SET A POI AS A DESTINATION

One of the Point of Interest icons can beselected on the map screen as a destina-tion and can be used for route guidance.

TO HIDE POI ICONS

101

2. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM


2 Touch “Route Trace”.

The “Route Trace” indicator is highlighted.


2 Touch “Route Trace”.

Touching “Yes” stops recording and theroute trace remains displayed on thescreen.Touching “No” stops recording and the

route trace is erased.

ROUTE TRACE

Up to 124 miles (200 km) of the trav-eled route can be stored and retracedon the display.

INFORMATION

●This feature is available when the mapscale is more than 30 miles (50 km).

TO START RECORDING THE ROUTE TRACE

TO STOP RECORDING THE ROUTE TRACE

102

3. ADDRESS BOOK

1. NAVIGATION SETTINGS


2 Touch “Navigation”.

3 Touch the desired items to be set.

On this screen, the following operationscan be performed:

Points or areas on the map can be regis-tered.The registered points can be used on the“Destination” screen. (See “DESTINA-TION SEARCH BY HOME” on page63, and “DESTINATION SEARCH BY“Address Book”” on page 75.)Registered areas to avoid, will be avoid-ed when the system searches for a route.

No. Function Page

Touch to set home. 103

Touch to set preset destina-tions. 105

Touch to set the addressbook. 107

Touch to set areas to avoid. 112

Touch to delete previousdestinations. 116

Touch to set detailed navi-gation settings. 117

103

3. ADDRESS BOOK

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM


2 Touch “Navigation” on the “Setup”screen.

3 Touch “Home”.




3 Touch “Home” on the “Navigation Set-tings” screen.

4 Touch “Set Home”.

5 Touch the desired screen button andenter the location in the same way as fora destination search. (See “DESTINA-TION SEARCH” on page 62.)

When registration of home is completed,the “Edit Home” screen will be displayed.

6 Touch “OK”.

SETTING UP THE “Home”

If home has been registered, that infor-mation can be recalled by touching “GoHome” on the “Destination” screen.(See “DESTINATION SEARCH BYHOME” on page 63.)

No. Function Page

Registering home 103

Editing home 104

Deleting home 104

REGISTERING HOME

To edit registered information, see“EDITING HOME” on page 104.

104

3. ADDRESS BOOK




4 Touch “Edit”.

5 Touch “Edit” next to the item to be edit-ed.

“Show Name on Map”: The name of a homecan be set to be displayed on the map bytouching “On” or “Off”. (See page 110.)

6 Touch “OK”.





5 Touch “Yes” to delete home and touch“No” to cancel the deletion.

EDITING HOME

No. Function Page

Touch to edit the homename. The name can be dis-played on the map.

110

Touch to edit location infor-mation. 110

Touch to edit the phonenumber. 111

Touch to change the icon tobe displayed on the map. 109

DELETING HOME

105

3. ADDRESS BOOK

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM



3 Touch “Preset Destinations”.




3 Touch “Preset Destinations” on the“Navigation Settings” screen.

4 Touch “Set”.


SETTING UP THE “Preset Destinations”

If preset destination has been regis-tered, that information can be recalledby using “Preset Destinations” on the“Navigation Settings” screen. (See“DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRE-SET DESTINATIONS” on page 63.)

No. Function Page

Registering a preset desti-nation 105

Editing a preset destination 106

Deleting a preset destina-tion 107

REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS

106

3. ADDRESS BOOK

6 Touch a position for this preset destina-tion.

When registration of a preset destination iscompleted, the “Edit Preset Destination”screen will be displayed.

7 Touch “OK”.




4 Touch “Edit”.

5 Touch the screen button of the desiredpreset destination.


“Show Name on Map”: The name of a pre-set destination can be set to be displayed onthe map by touching “On” or “Off”. (Seepage 110.)

7 Touch “OK”.

To edit registered information, see“EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS”on page 106.

EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS No. Function Page

Touch to edit the presetdestination name. Thename can be displayed onthe map.

110




107

3. ADDRESS BOOK

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM





5 Touch the preset destination to be de-leted.


7 Touch “Yes” to delete the preset desti-nation and touch “No” to cancel the de-letion.



3 Touch “Address Book”.


DELETING PRESET DESTINATIONS


“Select All” Touch to select all presetdestinations.

“Unselect All” Touch to cancel the“Select All” function.

SETTING UP THE “Address Book”

Points or areas on the map can be regis-tered.

No. Function Page

Registering address bookentries 108

Editing address book en-tries 108

Deleting address book en-tries 111

108

3. ADDRESS BOOK



3 Touch “Address Book” on the “Naviga-tion Settings” screen.

4 Touch “New”.


After the address book entry has been reg-istered, the “Edit Address Book Entry”screen will be displayed.

6 Touch “OK”.




4 Touch “Edit”.

5 Touch the screen button of the desiredaddress book entry.

REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES

To edit registered information, see“EDITING ADDRESS BOOKENTRIES” on page 108.

INFORMATION

● Up to 100 address book entries can beregistered.

EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES

The icon, name, location and/or phonenumber of a registered address bookentry can be edited.

109

3. ADDRESS BOOK

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM


“Show Name on Map”: The name of an ad-dress book entry can be set to be displayedon the map by touching “On” or “Off”. (Seepage 110.)

7 Touch “OK”.

■ TO CHANGE “Icon”

1 Touch “Edit”.

2 Touch the desired icon.

Change pages by touching the “Page 1”,“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.

■ SOUND ICONS

1 Touch the “With Sound” tab on the “Ad-dress Book Entry Icon” screen.

2 Touch the desired sound icon.

The next screen appears when “Bell (withDirection)” is touched.

No. Function Page

Touch to edit the addressbook entry name. Thename can be displayed onthe map.

110




A sound for some address book entriescan be set. When the vehicle approach-es the location of the address book en-try, the selected sound will be heard.

110

3. ADDRESS BOOK

3 Touch either or to adjust the di-rection. Then touch “OK”.

■ TO CHANGE “Name”

1 Touch “Edit”.

2 Enter the name using the alphanumerickeys.

Up to 70 characters can be entered.

3 Touch “OK”. The previous screen will be displayed.

■ DISPLAYING ADDRESS BOOKENTRY NAMES

1 Touch “On” to display the name on themap and touch “Off” to not display it.

■ TO CHANGE “Location”

1 Touch “Edit”.

2 Touch one of the 8 directional screenbuttons to move the cursor to the de-sired point on the map.


INFORMATION

● The bell sounds only when the vehicleapproaches this point in the direction thathas been set.

111

3. ADDRESS BOOK

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

■ TO CHANGE “Phone #” (PHONE NUMBER)

1 Touch “Edit”.

2 Enter the number using the numberkeys.






5 Touch the address to be deleted.


7 Touch “Yes” to delete the address bookentries and touch “No” to cancel the de-letion.

DELETING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES


“Select All” Touch to select all regis-tered addresses.

“Unselect All” Select to cancel the“Select All” function.

112

3. ADDRESS BOOK



3 Touch “Areas to Avoid”.




3 Touch “Areas to Avoid” on the “Naviga-tion Settings” screen.

4 Touch “New”.

5 Touch the desired screen button andenter the location in the same way as fora destination search, or display the mapof the area to be avoided. (See “DESTI-NATION SEARCH” on page 62.)

SETTING UP THE “Areas to Avoid”

Areas to be avoided because of trafficjams, construction work or other rea-sons can be registered as areas to avoid.

No. Function Page

Registering areas to avoid 112

Editing areas to avoid 113

Deleting areas to avoid 116

REGISTERING AREAS TO AVOID

113

3. ADDRESS BOOK

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM


“Adjust Location”: Touch to adjust the posi-tion in smaller increments.

7 Touch “Enter”.

8 Touch either or to change thesize of the area to be avoided.

9 Touch “OK”.When registration of an area to avoid is

completed, the “Area to Avoid” screen willbe displayed.




4 Touch “Edit”.

5 Touch the area to be avoided.

INFORMATION

● If a destination is input in the area to avoidor the route calculation cannot be madewithout running through the area toavoid, a route passing through the area tobe avoided may be shown.

● Up to 10 locations can be registered aspoints/areas to avoid.

EDITING AREA TO AVOID

The name, location and/or area size of aregistered area can be edited.

114

3. ADDRESS BOOK


“Show Name on Map”: The name of an areato be avoided can be set to be displayed onthe map by touching “On” or “Off”. (Seepage 114.)“Active”: The area to avoid feature can beset to “On” or “Off”.

7 Touch “OK”.

■ TO CHANGE “Name”

1 Touch “Edit”.


Up to 70 characters can be entered.


■ DISPLAYING NAMES OF AREASTO BE AVOIDED

1 Touch “On”, next to “Show Name onMap”, to display the name of an area tobe avoided on the map. Touch “Off” notto display it.

No. Function Page

Touch to edit the name ofthe area to avoid. The namecan be displayed on themap.

114

Touch to edit area location. 115

Touch to edit area size. 115

115

3. ADDRESS BOOK

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

■ TO CHANGE “Location”

1 Touch “Edit”.



■ TO CHANGE “Size”

1 Touch “Edit”.

2 Touch either or to change thesize of the area to be avoided.


116

3. ADDRESS BOOK





5 Touch the area to be deleted.


7 Touch “Yes” to delete the area(s) andtouch “No” to cancel the deletion.



3 Touch “Delete Previous Dest.”.

4 Touch the previous destination to be de-leted.


6 Touch “Yes” to delete the destination(s)and touch “No” to cancel the deletion.

DELETING AREAS TO AVOID


“Select All” Touch to select all regis-tered areas to avoid.


DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

Previous destinations can be deleted.


“Select All” Touch to select all previ-ous destinations.


117

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM4. SETUP

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS


2 Touch “Navigation”.

3 Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings”.


5 Touch “Save”.

Settings are available for driving speeds,favorite POI categories, automaticscreen change, “ Off” function, etc.

118

4. SETUP


SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS

No. Function

Touch to set the average drivingspeed. (See “DRIVING SPEEDS”on page 119.)

Touch to set the automatic inputfunction to “On” or “Off”.

Touch to set the voice guidance forthe next street name to “On” or“Off” during route guidance.

Touch to set the automatic reroute ofthe guidance route to avoid heavycongestion to “On” or “Off”. (See“AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC” on page120.)

Touch to set the indication of freelyflowing traffic by the arrow to “On”or “Off”. (See “SHOW FREEFLOWING TRAFFIC” on page 121.)

Touch to set displayed POI icon cat-egories. (See “POI CATEGORYCHANGE (SELECT POI ICONS)”on page 122.)

Touch to set screen buttons to bedisplayed on the map screen when“Off” is selected. (See“SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION(“Off” Function)” on page 123.)

119

4. SETUP

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM




3 Touch “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the“Navigation Settings” screen.

4 Touch “Driving Speeds”.

5 Touch “ ” or “ ” to set the average ve-hicle speeds for “Residential”, “MainStreets” and “Freeways”.

To set the default speeds, touch “Default”.To use settings based on traffic information,

touch “Consider Traffic Info.”.

6 After setting of the desired speeds iscompleted, touch “Save”.

Touch to adjust the current positionmark manually. Miscalculation of thedistance caused by tire replacementcan also be adjusted. (See “CUR-RENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGECALIBRATION” on page 124.)

Touch to set the display of pop-up in-formation to “On” or “Off”. (See“POP-UP INFORMATION” onpage 125.)

Touch to set IPD road guidance to“On” or “Off”. (For information onIPD roads, see page 89.)

No. Function DRIVING SPEEDS

The speed that is used for the calculationof the estimated travel time and estimat-ed arrival time can be set.

120

4. SETUP




4 Touch “Avoid Traffic”.

INFORMATION

●The displayed time to the destination isthe approximate driving time that is cal-culated based on the selected speedsand the actual position along the guid-ance route.

●The time shown on the screen may varygreatly depending on progress along theroute, which may be affected by condi-tions such as traffic jams and constructionwork.

●Up to 99 hours 59 minutes can be dis-played.

AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC

The guidance route automaticallychanges to another route to avoid heavycongestion when “Avoid Traffic” isturned on.

121

4. SETUP

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

5 Touch “On” or “Off”.

6 Touch “Save”.When congestion information about the

guidance route has been received, ascreen will appear to ask if it is desirable toreroute to avoid the congestion.Touch “Yes” to reroute. Another route to

avoid the congestion will appear.Touch “No” if it is not desirable to reroute.




4 Touch “Show Free Flowing Traffic”.


6 Touch “Save”.

INFORMATION


SHOW FREE FLOWING TRAFFIC

Free flowing traffic can be shown by anarrow when “Show Free FlowingTraffic” is turned on.

INFORMATION

●When the “Traffic Information” indicatoris dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic IncidentWarning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”will not operate.

122

4. SETUP




4 Touch “Favorite POI Categories”.

5 Touch the category to be changed.

6 Touch the desired group.

If the desired POI category is not on thescreen, touch “List All Categories” to listall POI categories.

7 Touch the desired category.

The screen returns to the “Favorite POICategories” screen.

8 Touch “OK”.

POI CATEGORY CHANGE (SELECT POI ICONS)

Select up to 6 POI icons to be displayedon the map screen.

123

4. SETUP

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM




4 Touch “ “Off” Function”.

5 Touch the screen buttons to be turnedoff. The selected screen buttons will bedimmed.

To set the setting as a default, touch“Default”.

6 Touch “OK”.The previous screen will be displayed.

7 Touch “Save”.

SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION (“Off” Function)

Each screen button and current streetname on the map screen can be dis-played or hidden.

124

4. SETUP




4 Touch “Calibration”.


■ POSITION/DIRECTION CALI-BRATION

1 Touch “Position / Direction”.


3 Touch “OK”.

CURRENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

The current position mark can be adjust-ed manually. Miscalculation of the dis-tance caused by tire replacement canalso be adjusted.

For additional information on the accu-racy of a current position, see “LIMITA-TIONS OF THE NAVIGATIONSYSTEM” on page 133.

When driving, the current position markwill be automatically corrected by GPSsignals. If GPS reception is poor due tolocation, the current position mark canbe adjusted manually.

125

4. SETUP

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

4 Touch either or to adjust the di-rection of the current position mark.

5 Touch “OK”.The map will be displayed.

■ TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

1 To perform the distance calibration pro-cedure, touch “Tire Change”.

The message appears and the quick dis-tance calibration is automatically started. Afew seconds later, a map will be displayed.




4 Touch “Pop-up Information”.


6 Touch “Save”.When “Pop-up Information” is turned off,

the following messages will not be dis-played.

The tire change calibration function willbe used when replacing the tires. Thisfunction will adjust miscalculationcaused by the circumference differencebetween the old and new tires.

INFORMATION

●If this procedure is not performed whenthe tires are replaced, the current posi-tion mark may be incorrectly displayed.

POP-UP INFORMATION

When “Pop-up Information” is turnedon, pop-up information will be displayed.

126

4. SETUP

This message appears when the mapscale is over 0.5 miles (800 m).

This message appears when the map isswitched to dual map screen mode.

127

4. SETUP

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

2. VEHICLE SETTINGS


2 Touch “Vehicle”.

3 Touch “Maintenance”.


Setting maintenance information. (Seepage 128.)Setting dealer. (See page 130.)

MAINTENANCE

When the navigation system is turnedon, the “Maintenance Reminder” screendisplays when it is time to replace a partor certain components. (See page 28.)

128

4. SETUP


2 Touch “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.

3 Touch “Maintenance” on the “VehicleSettings” screen.


When the vehicle needs to be serviced, thescreen button color will change to orange.

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SETTING


“Engine oil” Replace engine oil

“Oil filter” Replace engine oil filter

“Rotation” Rotate tires

“Tires” Replace tires

“Battery” Replace battery

“Brake pad” Replace brake pads

“Wipers” Replace wiper blades

“Coolant” Replace coolant

“Brake oil” Replace brake fluid

“Trans. fluid” Replace transmission flu-id

“Service” Scheduled maintenance

“Air filter” Replace air filter

“Personal”New information itemscan be created separatelyfrom provided ones.

“Delete All”Touch to cancel all condi-tions which have been in-put.

“Reset All”Touch to reset the itemwhich has satisfied a con-dition.

129

4. SETUP

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

5 Input the conditions.

6 Touch “OK”.The screen then returns to the “Mainte-

nance” screen.

“Set Dealer”

Touch to register dealerinformation. (See “DEAL-ER SETTING” on page130.)

“Dealer Info.”Touch to edit dealer infor-mation. (See “DEALERSETTING” on page 130.)

“Reminder”

When this screen buttonis touched, the indicator isilluminated. The system isset to give maintenanceinformation with the“Maintenance Reminder”screen. (See page 28.)


No. Function

Touch to input the next maintenancedate.

Touch to input the driving distanceuntil the next maintenance check.

Touch to cancel the date and distanceconditions.

Touch to reset the date and distanceconditions.

INFORMATION

●For scheduled maintenance information,refer to “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/ScheduledMaintenance”.

●Depending on driving or road conditions,the actual date and distance maintenanceshould be performed may differ from thestored date and distance in the system.

130

4. SETUP



3 Touch “Maintenance” on the “VehicleSettings” screen.

4 Touch “Set Dealer”.

5 If a dealer has not been registered, enterthe location of a dealer in the same wayas for a destination search. (See “DES-TINATION SEARCH” on page 62.)

When “Set Dealer” registration is finished,the “Dealer” screen is displayed.


DEALER SETTING

Dealer information can be registered inthe system. With dealer information reg-istered, route guidance to the dealer isavailable.

No. Function Page

Touch to enter the name ofa dealer. 131

Touch to enter the name ofa dealer member. 131

Touch to set the location. 131

Touch to enter the phonenumber. 132

Touch to delete the dealerinformation displayed onthe screen.

Touch to set the displayeddealer as a destination. 81

131

4. SETUP

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

■ TO EDIT “Dealer” OR “Contact”

1 Touch “Edit” next to “Dealer” or “Con-tact”.


Up to 70 characters can be entered fordealer and 24 characters for contact.


■ TO EDIT “Location”

1 Touch “Edit” next to “Location”.

2 Touch one of the 8 directional screenbuttons to move the cursor to the de-sired point on the map screen.


132

4. SETUP

■ TO EDIT “Phone #” (PHONE NUMBER)

1 Touch “Edit” next to “Phone #”.

2 Enter the number using number keys.


133

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

1. LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

The Global Positioning System (GPS) de-veloped and operated by the U.S. Depart-ment of Defense provides an accuratecurrent position, normally using 4 or moresatellites, and in some case 3 satellites. TheGPS system has a certain level of inaccura-cy. While the navigation system will com-pensate for this most of the time, occasionalpositioning errors of up to 300 ft. (100 m)can and should be expected. Generally, po-sition errors will be corrected within a fewseconds.

When the vehicle is receiving signals fromsatellites, the “GPS” mark appears at thetop left of the screen.The GPS signal may be physically obstruct-ed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position onthe map screen. Tunnels, tall buildings,trucks, or even the placement of objects onthe instrument panel may obstruct the GPSsignals.The GPS satellites may not send signals dueto repairs or improvements being made tothem.Even when the navigation system is receiv-ing clear GPS signals, the vehicle positionmay not be shown accurately or inappropri-ate route guidance may occur in some cas-es.

This navigation system calculates thecurrent position using satellite signals,various vehicle signals, map data, etc.However, an accurate position may notbe shown depending on satellite condi-tions, road configuration, vehicle condi-tion or other circumstances.

NOTICE

● The installation of window tinting mayobstruct the GPS signals. Most windowtinting contains some metallic contentthat will interfere with GPS signal recep-tion of the antenna in the instrumentpanel. We advise against the use of win-dow tinting on vehicles equipped withnavigation systems.

134

5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

Accurate current position may not beshown in the following cases:• When driving on a small angled Y-shaped

road.• When driving on a winding road.• When driving on a slippery road such as

in sand, gravel, snow, etc.• When driving on a long straight road.• When freeway and surface streets run in

parallel.• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.• When a long route is searched during

high speed driving.• When driving without setting the current

position calibration correctly.• After repeating a change of direction by

going forward and backward, or turningon a turntable in a parking lot.

• When leaving a covered parking lot orparking garage.

• When a roof carrier is installed.• When driving with tire chains installed.• When the tires are worn.• After replacing a tire or tires.• When using tires that are smaller or

larger than the factory specifications.• When the tire pressure in any of the 4

tires is not correct.

Inappropriate route guidance may occur inthe following cases:• When turning at an intersection off the

designated route guidance.• If you set more than 1 destination but skip

any of them, auto reroute will display aroute returning to the destination on theprevious route.

• When turning at an intersection for whichthere is no route guidance.

• When passing through an intersection forwhich there is no route guidance.

• During auto reroute, the route guidancemay not be available for the next turn tothe right or left.

• During high speed driving, it may take along time for auto reroute to operate. Inauto reroute, a detour route may beshown.

• After auto reroute, the route may not bechanged.

• If an unnecessary U-turn is shown orannounced.

• If a location has multiple names and thesystem announces 1 or more of them.

• When a route cannot be searched.• If the route to your destination includes

gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the routeguidance may not be shown.

• Your destination point might be shown onthe opposite side of the street.

• When a portion of the route has regula-tions prohibiting the entry of the vehiclethat vary by time or season or other rea-sons.

• The road and map data stored in the navi-gation system may not be complete ormay not be the latest version.

If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals,the current position can be adjustedmanually. For information on setting thecurrent position calibration, see page124.

After replacing a tire, implement theoperation described in “TIRE CHANGECALIBRATION”. (See page 125.)

135


3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

INFORMATION

● This navigation system uses tire turningdata and is designed to work with factory-specified tires for the vehicle. Installingtires that are larger or smaller than theoriginally equipped diameter may causeinaccurate display of the current position.The tire pressure also affects the diame-ter of the tires, so make sure that the tirepressure of all 4 tires is correct.

136


4

137

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. QUICK REFERENCE ............................ 138

2. PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONE) .......................... 140

USING THE PHONE SWITCH......................... 141

USING THE STEERING SWITCHES ............ 142

ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK IN THIS SYSTEM .................................................................... 143

WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE ............................................... 143

3. REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE..... 146

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE ..... 148

RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth® PHONE............................................ 150

4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE .............................. 151

BY DIAL......................................................................... 151

BY PHONEBOOK .................................................. 151

BY SPEED DIAL ....................................................... 153

BY CALL HISTORY ............................................... 153

BY VOICE RECOGNITION............................. 155

CALLING USING AN SMS/MMS MESSAGE .................................................. 157

BY POI* CALL .......................................................... 157

5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE ............................. 158

6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE ............................. 159

WHEN YOU SELECT “0-9” .............................. 159

INCOMING CALL WAITING .......................... 161

7. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION............................................. 162

CHECKING MESSAGES................................... 162

REPLYING (QUICK REPLY) ............................ 163

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION................ 164

1. PHONE SETTINGS................................. 165

PHONE SOUND SETTINGS............................ 165

PHONEBOOK......................................................... 167

MESSAGE SETTINGS ......................................... 180

PHONE DISPLAY SETTINGS.......................... 184

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS ........................... 187

REGISTERED DEVICES ...................................... 187

SELECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE.............. 192

SELECTING PORTABLE PLAYER................ 193

DETAILED Bluetooth® SETTINGS ................. 195

1 PHONE OPERATION

2 SETUP

PHONE

*: Point of Interest

138

1. PHONE OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

Bluetooth® phones can be operated via the navigation system’s screen. To display thehands-free operation screen, press the button or the switch on the steeringwheel.

139

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

No. Name Function

The condition of Bluetooth® connection

No connection GoodAn antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built in the instrumentpanel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may deteriorateand the system may not function when a Bluetooth® phone is used inthe following conditions and/or places: The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when

it is behind the seat or in the glove box and console box). The cellular phone touches or is covered with metal materials.Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of theBluetooth® connection is good.When the cellular phone is not connected, “No Connect” is dis-played.

The amount ofbattery chargeleft

Empty FullThis is not displayed when the Bluetooth® is not connected.The amount displayed does not always correspond with the amountdisplayed on the cellular phone. The amount of battery charge leftmay not be displayed depending on the type of phone you have. Thissystem does not have a charging function.

The receiving area

“Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area.The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type ofphone you have.

The level of reception

Poor ExcellentThe level of reception does not always correspond with the level dis-played on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be dis-played depending on the phone you have.When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inac-cessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.

“SETUP” buttonPress to display the “Setup” screen. Touching “Phone” or“Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen displays the hands-free setupscreen.

button Press to display the hands-free operation screen.


140

1. PHONE OPERATION

2. PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONE)

*: This profile is necessary when usingApps. (See “APPS” on page 346.)

The hands-free system enables calls tobe made and received without having totake your hands off the steering wheel.

This system supports Bluetooth®.Bluetooth® is a wireless data systemthat enables cellular phones to be usedwithout being connected by a cable orplaced in a cradle.The operating procedure of the phone isexplained here.

For registering and setting of the phone,see “PHONE SETTINGS” on page 165and “Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page187.

CAUTION

●While driving, do not use a cellular phoneor connect the Bluetooth® phone.

●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®

antennas. People with implanted pace-makers or cardiac defibrillators shouldmaintain a reasonable distance betweenthemselves and the Bluetooth® antennas.The radio waves may affect the operationof such devices.

●Before using Bluetooth® devices, usersof any electrical medical device otherthan implanted pacemakers andimplanted cardiac defibrillators shouldconsult the manufacturer of the devicefor information about its operation underthe influence of radio waves. Radio wavescould have unexpected effects on theoperation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

● Do not leave your cellular phone in thevehicle. The temperature inside may riseto a level that could damage the phone.

INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone does not supportBluetooth®, this system cannot function.

●In the following conditions, the systemmay not function:• The cellular phone is turned off.• The current position is outside the com-

munication area.• The cellular phone is not connected.• The cellular phone has a low battery.

●When using Bluetooth® audio andhands-free at the same time, the followingproblems may occur:

• The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.

• Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth®

audio playback.●This system supports the following ser-

vices:

• Bluetooth® SpecificationVer. 1.1 or higher(Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR orhigher)

• ProfilesHFP (Hands Free Profile)Ver. 1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or higher)OPP (Object Push Profile)Ver. 1.1 or higherPBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)Ver. 1.0 or higherMAP (Message Access Profile)Ver. 1.0 or higherSPP (Serial Port Profile)Ver. 1.1 or higher*

141

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

The microphone can be used when talkingon the phone.

IS F/IS350/IS250

IS350C/IS250C

INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone does not supportHFP, registering the Bluetooth® phoneor using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP pro-files individually will not be possible.

●If the connected Bluetooth® phone ver-sion is older than recommended orincompatible, this function may not beused.

●Refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink to find approved Bluetooth®

phones for this system.

USING THE PHONE SWITCH

By pressing the phone switch, a call canbe received or ended without takingyour hands off the steering wheel.

142

1. PHONE OPERATION

Volume control switchPress the “+” side to increase the volume.Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.

INFORMATION

●The other party’s voice will be heard fromthe front speakers. The audio/video sys-tem will be muted during phone calls orwhen hands-free voice commands areused.

●Talk alternately with the other party onthe phone. If both parties speak at thesame time, the other party may not hearwhat has been said. (This is not a malfunc-tion.)

●Keep call volume down. Otherwise, theother party’s voice may be audible out-side the vehicle and voice echo mayincrease. When talking on the phone,speak clearly towards the microphone.

●The other party may not hear you clearlywhen:• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making

excessive traffic noise.)• Driving at high speeds.• The roof or windows are open.• The air conditioning vents are pointed

towards the microphone.• The sound of the air-conditioning fan is

loud.• There is a negative effect on sound

quality due to the phone and/or networkbeing used.

USING THE STEERING SWITCHES

143

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

The following data is stored for every regis-tered phone. When another phone is con-nected, the following registered datacannot be read:• Phonebook data• Call history data• Speed dial data• Image data• All phone settings• Message settings

The following data in the system can be ini-tialized:• Phonebook data• Call history data• Speed dial data• Image data• All phone settings• Message settings

ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK IN THIS SYSTEM

INFORMATION

●When a phone’s registration is deleted,the above-mentioned data is alsodeleted.

WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE

A lot of personal data is registered whenthe hands-free system is used. Whenselling or disposing of the vehicle, initial-ize the data. (See “DELETING PER-SONAL DATA” on page 54.)

INFORMATION

●Once initialized, the data and settings willbe erased. Pay much attention when ini-tializing the data.

144

1. PHONE OPERATION

U.S.A. Canada

FCC ID : AJDK041This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

CAUTION

●FCC WARNING: Changes ormodifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

●This equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment and meets theFCC radio frequency (RF) ExposureGuidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels of RFenergy that it deemed to comply withoutmaximum permissive exposureevaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that itshould be installed and operated keepingthe radiator at least 20cm or more awayfrom person’s body (excludingextremities: hands, wrists, feet andankles).

●Co-location: This transmitter must not beco-located or operated in conjunctionwith any other antenna or transmitter.

IC : 775E-K041This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSSstandard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference,including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.Le présent appareil est conforme auxCNR d’Industrie Canada applicablesaux appareils radio exempts de licence.L’exploitation est autorisée aux deuxconditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doitpas produire de brouillage, et (2)l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit acceptertout brouillage radioélectrique subi,même si le brouillage est susceptible d’encompromettre le fonctionnement.

145

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

CAUTION

●This equipment complies with ICradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment and meetsRSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)Exposure rules. This equipment has verylow levels of RF energy that it deemed tocomply without maximum permissiveexposure evaluation (MPE). But it isdesirable that it should be installed andoperated keeping the radiator at least20cm or more away from person’s body(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feetand ankles).Cet équipement est conforme aux limitesd’exposition aux rayonnements énoncéespour un environnement non contrôlé etrespecte les règles d’exposition auxfréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet uneénergie RF très faible qui est considéréeconforme sans évaluation de l’expositionmaximale autorisée. Cependant, cetéquipement doit être installé et utilisé engardant une distance de 20 cm ou plusentre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (àl’exception des extrémités : mains,poignets, pieds et chevilles).

Under Industry Canada regulations, thisradio transmitter may only operate usingan antenna of a type and maximum (orlesser) gain approved for the transmitterby Industry Canada. To reduce potentialradio interference to other users, theantenna type and its gain should be sochosen that the equivalent isotropicallyradiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more thanthat necessary for successful communi-cation.Conformément à la réglementationd’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteurradio peut fonctionner avec une antenned’un type et d’un gain maximal (ouinférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur parIndustrie Canada. Dans le but de réduireles risques de brouillage radioélectriqueà l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il fautchoisir le type d’antenne et son gain desorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnéeéquivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pasl’intensité nécessaire à l’établissementd’une communication satisfaisante.

146

1. PHONE OPERATION

3. REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE

1 Press the button or the switch onthe steering wheel.

2 Touch “Yes” to register a phone.

If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already beenregistered, a registered device needs to bedeleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth®

devices have already been registered” onpage 147.

3 When this screen is displayed, operatethe Bluetooth® device.

Search for the navigation system displayedon the system’s screen using yourBluetooth® device, and register theBluetooth® device.For details about operating the Bluetooth®

device, see the manual that comes with it.A passcode is not required for SSP (Secure

Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth®

phones. Depending on the type ofBluetooth® phone being connected, amessage confirming registration may bedisplayed on the Bluetooth® phone’sscreen. Respond and operate theBluetooth® phone according to the confir-mation message.To cancel the registration, touch “Cancel”.

If the Bluetooth® phone to be registeredhas a Bluetooth® audio function, this canbe registered at the same time.

To use the hands-free system, it is neces-sary to register a phone with the system.Once the phone has been registered, itis possible to make a hands-free call.

If a Bluetooth® phone has not been reg-istered yet, it is necessary to register itfirst according to the following proce-dure. A Bluetooth® phone cannot beregistered while driving.

See “REGISTERING A Bluetooth®

DEVICE” on page 188 of additional reg-istration when registering.

147

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

4 This screen will be displayed when reg-istration is complete.

When using the same phone, it is not nec-essary to register it again.

When this screen is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

When another Bluetooth® device is con-nected

When another Bluetooth® device is cur-rently connected, this screen is displayed.

To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,touch “Yes”.

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-ready been registered

1 When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-ready been registered, a registered de-vice needs to be deleted. Touch “Yes” todelete 1 or more.

2 Touch the device to be deleted, thentouch “Remove”.

3 Touch “Yes”.

If the Bluetooth® phone has aBluetooth® audio function

When the Bluetooth® phone to be regis-tered has a Bluetooth® audio function, thisaudio function will be registered automati-cally at the same time and this screen maybe displayed. If this screen is displayed,touch “Yes” to connect the audio functionor touch “No” to cancel the connection.

148

1. PHONE OPERATION

For automatic connection, see “CHANG-ING “Bluetooth* Power”” on page 196.

When the “ENGINE START STOP” switchis in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ONmode, the system searches for a nearbyregistered cellular phone.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

The system will connect with the phone thatwas last connected, if it is nearby.When “Display Phone Status” is set to“On”, the connection status is displayed.(See “Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNEC-TION STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS” onpage 197.)

This screen appears when the Bluetooth®

phone is first connected after the“ENGINE START STOP” switch is inACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE

AUTOMATICALLY

When a phone is registered, auto con-nection is turned on. Always set it to thismode and leave the Bluetooth® phonein a location where connection can beestablished.

INFORMATION

●It may take time if the phone connectionis carried out during Bluetooth® deviceplayback.

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thephone.

149

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE


2 Touch “Connect Phone”.

3 Touch the screen button correspondingto the desired phone connection.

When the cellular phone’s device name hasnot been able to be obtained, “Device 1” to“Device 5” will be displayed in the order thephones were registered.



5 When the connection is completed, thisscreen is displayed.

Now you can use the Bluetooth® phone.

When a phone is connected whileBluetooth® audio is playing

This screen is displayed, and theBluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.

MANUALLY

When the auto connection has failed or“Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it isnecessary to connect Bluetooth® man-ually.

150

1. PHONE OPERATION

If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected onpurpose, such as turning it off, this does nothappen. Reconnect the Bluetooth® phonemanually.

RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth® PHONE

If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnecteddue to poor reception from theBluetooth® network when the “EN-GINE START STOP” switch is in AC-CESSORY or IGNITION ON mode,the system automatically reconnects theBluetooth® phone. When “DisplayPhone Status” is set to “On”, the con-nection status is displayed.

151

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE


2 Touch the desired key to input thephone number.

Each time is touched, an input digit isdeleted.

3 Touch or press the switch onthe steering wheel.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thephone.

1 Touch “Contacts”.

2 Touch the desired data from the list.

After a Bluetooth® phone has been reg-istered, a call can be made using thehands-free system. There are 7 methodsby which a call can be made. These aredescribed below.

BY DIAL

A call can be made by inputting thephone number.This cannot be operated while driving.

BY PHONEBOOK

Calls can be made by using the phone-book data which is transferred from theregistered cellular phone.The phonebook changes depending onthe phone connected. Up to 1000 con-tacts (maximum of 3 numbers per con-tact) can be registered in eachphonebook.This cannot be operated while driving.

152

1. PHONE OPERATION

3 Touch the desired number from the list.


1 Touch “Contacts”.

2 Touch “Yes” or “Transfer” to automati-cally transfer the phonebook from theconnected phone.

Touch “Manual” to transfer the phonebookmanually. (See “TRANSFERRING APHONE NUMBER” on page 168.)Touch “No” or “Cancel” to cancel transfer-

ring. If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor

OPP compatible, the phonebook cannotbe transferred.

PBAP compatible models

PBAP incompatible but OPP compatiblemodels

3 Transfer the phonebook data to the sys-tem using the Bluetooth® phone.

This operation may be unnecessarydepending on the type of cellular phone.Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring phonebook data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

This screen appears while transferring. Tocancel this function, touch “Cancel”.

WHEN THE PHONEBOOK IS EMPTY

153

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

4 When the data transfer from a PBAP in-compatible but OPP compatible modelis complete, “Done” will appear on thescreen. Touch “Done”.

1 Touch “Speed Dials”.

2 Touch the desired number to call.

The list to be displayed can be changed bytouching the “Speed Dial 1”, “Speed Dial2” or “Speed Dial 3” tab.

INFORMATION


phone:• It may be necessary to perform addi-

tional steps on the phone when transfer-ring phonebook data.

• The registered image on the phone-book may not appear when phonebookdata is transferred.

BY SPEED DIAL

Calls can be made using registeredphone numbers which can be selectedfrom a phonebook. (See “REGISTER-ING THE SPEED DIAL” on page 176for registering the speed dial.)This can be operated while driving.

BY CALL HISTORY

CALLS CAN BE MADE BY CALL HISTORY WHICH HAS 4 FUNCTIONS

All: all calls (missed, incoming or outgo-ing)Up to 25 call history items can be select-ed from the “All” tab while driving.Missed: calls that were missedIncoming: calls that were receivedOutgoing: calls that were made

154

1. PHONE OPERATION

1 Touch “Call History”.

2 Touch the desired data from the list.

The list to be displayed can be changed bytouching the “All”, “Missed”, “Incoming” or“Outgoing” tab.


1 Press the button or the switch onthe steering wheel to display the“Phone” screen.

2 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to display the “Call History”screen.

3 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to select the latest history item.

4 Touch or press the switch onthe steering wheel to call the latest his-tory item.

When making a call by phonebook, thename (if registered) is displayed.When making a call to the same number

continuously, only the most recent call islisted in call history.When a phone number registered in the

phonebook is received, the name and thenumber are displayed.Number-withheld calls are also memorized

in the system. International phone calls may not be made

depending on the type of cellular phoneyou have.

CALLS CAN BE MADE USING THE LATEST CALL HISTORY ITEM

155

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

1 Press the talk switch. “Call <name> <type>” is displayed in the

“Shortcut Menu” screen.When “Call <name> <type>” on the “Short-

cut Menu” screen is dimmed, the phone-book’s voice command recognition cannotbe used. Check the Bluetooth® connec-tion and if the contacts have been trans-ferred to the navigation system.

2 Say the name, or the name and type ofphone, of a registered contact.

In the same manner as it is displayed on thescreen, “Call <name> <type>”, after saying“Call” say the name, or the name and typeof phone, of a contact.For example: “Call”, “John Smith” or “Call”,“Mary Davis”, “Mobile”There are 4 types of phones: Home,

Mobile, Office and Other.Short or abbreviated names in the phone-

book may not be recognized. Changenames in the phonebook to full names. Sometimes a voice recognition result con-

firmation screen will be displayed. Afterconfirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.When the system recognizes multiple

names from the phonebook, a name candi-date list will be displayed on the screen. Ifthe desired name is not displayed on thetop of the screen, say the number of thename from the candidate list (number 1 andnumber 2) to select a name from the candi-date list.When a contact has multiple phone num-

bers registered in the phonebook, a candi-date list will be displayed. If the desiredphone number is not displayed on the topof the screen, say the number of the desiredphone number from the candidate list(number 1 and number 2) to select a phonenumber from the candidate list.

3 Say “Dial” to call the phone number.

BY VOICE RECOGNITION

Calls can be made by giving a voicecommand. (For the operation and com-mand of voice recognition, see “VOICECOMMAND SYSTEM” on page 298.)This can be operated while driving.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: CALL NAME

156

1. PHONE OPERATION

1 Press the talk switch. “Dial <number>” is displayed in the “Short-

cut Menu” screen.When “Dial <number>” on the “Shortcut

Menu” screen is dimmed, the phone num-ber voice recognition cannot be used.Check the Bluetooth® phone connection.

2 Say the phone number. In the same manner as it is displayed on the

screen, “Dial <number>”, after saying “Dial”say the phone number. Say the phone number one digit at a time.

For example, if the phone number is2345678:Say “two three four five six seven eight”Do not say “twenty three forty five sixtyseven eight”The system can recognize the following

types of phone numbers:3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)10 digit numbers (Area code + Localphone number)11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code +Local phone number)As the system cannot recognize additional

numbers, say the complete number withoutstopping.When the system recognizes multiple

phone numbers, a phone number candi-date list will be displayed on the screen. Ifthe desired phone number is not displayedon the top of the screen, say the number ofthe desired phone number from the candi-date list (number 1 and number 2) to selecta phone number from the candidate list.

3 Say “Dial” to call the phone number.

■ INTERNATIONAL CALL

1 Go to the “Main Menu” screen bypressing the talk switch on the steeringwheel and saying “Main menu” or touch“Main Menu”.

2 Say “Use the phone”.

3 Say “International call”.Up to 24 digits can be recognized when

using the international call function. Thenumber can also be divided into multiplegroups and recognized.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER To dial a phone number that is not a 3, 7,

10 or 11 digit number, for example an in-ternational number, use “InternationalCall”.

Calling without the voice recognition:After the desired phone number is dis-played, a call can also made by pressingthe switch on the steering wheel.Canceling the voice recognition: Thevoice recognition will be canceled wheneither of the following is performed:

• Press and hold the talk switch.• Touch “Cancel”.

157

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

1 Touch “Messages”.

When “Message Transfer” is set to “Off”, aconfirmation screen will be displayed.Touch “Yes”. (See page 180.)

2 Touch the “SMS/MMS” tab and thentouch the desired received messagefrom the list.

The tab display may vary depending on thetype of cellular phone.


CALLING USING AN SMS/MMS MESSAGE

Calls can be made to an SMS (ShortMessage Service)/MMS (MultimediaMessaging Service) message sender’sphone number.This can be operated while driving.

BY POI CALL

A call can be made by touching when it is displayed on the screen fromthe navigation system. (See “TO SEEINFORMATION ABOUT THE ICONWHERE THE CURSOR IS SET” onpage 37 and “VIEW DETAILED FUELPRICE INFORMATION” on page323.)

158

1. PHONE OPERATION

5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

1 Touch or press the switch onthe steering wheel to talk on the phone.

When a call is received, this screen isdisplayed with a sound.

To refuse to receive the call: Touch

or press the switch on thesteering wheel.To adjust the volume of a received call:Touch “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR·VOL”knob, or use the volume switch on thesteering wheel.

INFORMATION

●During international phone calls, theother party’s name or number may not bedisplayed correctly depending on thetype of cellular phone you have.

●The incoming call display mode can beset. (See “INCOMING CALL DIS-PLAY” on page 185.)

159

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

1 Touch the desired number to input thekey.

While talking on the phone, this screen isdisplayed. The operations outlined be-low can be performed on this screen.

To adjust the volume of the other party’svoice: Touch “-” or “+”, turn the“PWR·VOL” knob, or use the volumeswitch on the steering wheel.

To hang up the phone: Touch orpress the switch on the steeringwheel.To mute your voice: Touch “Mute”.To input a key: Touch “0-9”.To transfer the call: Touch “HandsetMode” to change from hands-free call tocellular phone call. Touch “HandsfreeMode” to change from cellular phone callto hands-free call.

INFORMATION

●Changing from hands-free call to cellularphone call is not possible while driving.

●When cellular phone call is changed tohands-free call, the hands-free screen willbe displayed and its functions can beoperated on the screen.

●Changing between cellular phone calland hands-free call can be performed byoperating the cellular phone directly.

●Transferring methods and operations willbe different depending on the type of cel-lular phone you have.

●For the operation of the cellular phone,see the manual that comes with it.

WHEN YOU SELECT “0-9”

INPUTTING A KEY

Inputting a key is not possible while driv-ing.

To hang up the phone: Touch orpress the switch on the steeringwheel.

160

1. PHONE OPERATION

1 Confirm the number displayed on thescreen and touch “Send”. The numberbefore marked sign will be sent.

When “Clear” is touched, this function isfinished and the normal tone screenappears.

TONE SIGNAL

If a continuous tone signal is registeredin a phonebook, this screen appears. (Ifnot registered, “Send” and “Clear” arenot displayed.) This can be operatedwhile driving.

To hang up the phone: Touch orpress the switch on the steeringwheel.

INFORMATION

●The continuous tone signal is the markedsign (p or w) and the number that followsthe phone number. (e.g.056133w0123p#1)

●When the “p” pause tone is used, afterwaiting 2 seconds the tone data up untilthe next pause tone will be automaticallysent. When the “w” pause tone is used,the tone data up until the next pause tonewill be automatically sent after user oper-ation.

●This operation can be done when it isdesirable to operate an answeringmachine or use a telephone service in abank for example. The phone numberand the code number in the phonebookcan be registered.

BY VOICE RECOGNITION

“Send Tones” can be operated by givinga command during a call.

The operating procedure is similar toother voice recognition operations. (Forthe operation of voice recognition, see“VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM” onpage 298.)

161

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

1 Touch or press the switchon the steering wheel to start talkingwith the other party.

INCOMING CALL WAITING

When a call is interrupted by a third par-ty while talking, this screen is displayed.

Touch or press the switchon the steering wheel to refuse the call.

Each time is touched or the switch on the steering wheel is pressedduring an interrupted call, the party whois on hold will be switched.

INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone does not supportHFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used.

●The ring tone that has been set in the“Phone Sound Settings” screen soundswhen there is an incoming call. Depend-ing on the type of Bluetooth® phone,both the navigation system andBluetooth® phone may sound simulta-neously when there is an incoming call.(See “RING TONE SETTING” on page166.)

162

1. PHONE OPERATION

7. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION


2 Touch “Messages”.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thephone.When “Message Transfer” is set to “Off”, a

confirmation screen will be displayed.Touch “Yes”. (See page 180.)

3 Touch the screen button correspondingto the desired message.

Messages are displayed in the appropriateconnected Bluetooth® phone’s registeredmail address folder. Touch the tab of thedesired folder to be displayed.

4 Messages can be checked.

Touching “Previous” or “Next” displays theprevious or next message.Only received messages on the connected

Bluetooth® phone can be displayed.The text of the message is not displayed

while driving.

5 Touch “Play” to start reading out of themessage. Touch “Stop” to stop the func-tion.

Touch “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR·VOL”knob, or use the volume switch on thesteering wheel to adjust the message readout volume.The message read out function is available

even while driving.

Received messages can be forwardedfrom the connected Bluetooth® phone,enabling checking and replying usingthe navigation system (Quick reply).

CHECKING MESSAGES

163

1. PHONE OPERATION

4

PHO

NE

1 Touch “Reply”.


3 Touch “Send”.While the message is being sent, a sending

message screen is displayed.

4 This screen will be displayed if messagedelivery fails.

Touch “Retry” to attempt to send the mes-sage again or touch “Cancel” to cancel.

When the received message is an e-mailand “Update Message Read Status onPhone” is set to “On”, “Mark as Unread”or “Mark as Read” can be selected.Touch “Mark as Unread” to mark mailsthat have been read on the Bluetooth®

phone as unread. Conversely, touch“Mark as Read” to mark mails that havenot been read on the Bluetooth® phoneas read. (See “MESSAGE SETTINGS”on page 180.)For SMS/MMS, touching or

pressing the switch on the steeringwheel calls the sender. (See page 157.)Touch “Reply” to reply to the message.

(See page 163.)

REPLYING (QUICK REPLY)

164

1. PHONE OPERATION

1 Reply messages can be edited while thevehicle is parked. Touch “Edit”.


3 Touch “OK” when editing is completed.

4 Touch .

1 Touch “Read” to check the message.The “Messages” screen will be displayed.When “Automatic Message Readout” is

set to “On”, the message will be automati-cally read out. (See “MESSAGE SET-TINGS” on page 180.)

EDITING REPLY MESSAGES NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION

If “New Message Pop-up” and “NewMessage Voice Notification” are set to“On”, a notification appears on thescreen and a voice notification will beheard when a new message arrives.(See “MESSAGE SETTINGS” on page180.)

For SMS/MMS, touching orpressing the switch on the steeringwheel calls the sender. (See page 157.)To check the message later, touch

“Ignore” or .

165

4

PHO

NE

2. SETUP

1. PHONE SETTINGS


2 Touch “Phone”.

3 Perform each setting according to theprocedures outlined on the followingpages.

1 Touch “Phone Sound Settings”.


3 When all settings are completed, touch“Save”.

The phonebook can be edited. Volume,display and message settings can alsobe changed.

PHONE SOUND SETTINGS

The call and ring tone volume can be ad-justed. A ring tone can be selected.

166

2. SETUP

1 Touch “Call Volume” on the “PhoneSound Settings” screen.

2 Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the call vol-ume.

3 Touch “OK”.

1 Touch “Ring Tone Volume” on the“Phone Sound Settings” screen.

2 Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the ring tonevolume.

3 Touch “OK”.

1 Touch “Ring Tone” on the “PhoneSound Settings” screen.

2 Touch the screen button correspondingto the desired ring tone.

Ring tones can be heard by touching thescreen buttons.

3 Touch “OK”.

1 Touch “Default” on the “Phone SoundSettings” screen.

2 Touch “Yes”.

INFORMATION

●The system will automatically increasethe volume when the speed exceeds 50mph (80 km/h).

CALL VOLUME SETTING

RING TONE VOLUME SETTING

RING TONE SETTING

INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS

The settings can be initialized.

167

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE


2 Touch “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

3 Touch “Phonebook”.




3 Touch “Phonebook” on the “Phone Set-tings” screen.

4 Touch “Manage Contacts”.


PHONEBOOK

The call history can be deleted andphonebook and speed dial settings canbe changed.

INFORMATION

●Phonebook data is managed indepen-dently for every registered phone. Whenone phone is connected, another phone’sregistered data cannot be read.

SETTING THE PHONEBOOK

The phonebook can be transferred froma Bluetooth® phone to the system. Thephonebook also can be added, editedand deleted.

168

2. SETUP

■ THE “Contacts” SCREEN CANALSO BE DISPLAYED


2 Touch “Contacts” on the “Phone”screen.

3 Touch “Options”.

4 Touch “Manage Contacts”.

■ TRANSFERRING A PHONE NUM-BER

The phone numbers in a Bluetooth®

phone can be transferred to the system.The system can manage up to 5 phone-books. Up to 1000 contacts (maximumof 3 numbers per contact) can be regis-tered in each phonebook.Operation methods differ betweenPBAP compatible and PBAP incompat-ible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®

phones.If your cellular phone is neither PBAPnor OPP compatible, the phonebookcannot be transferred.

169

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®

phones

1 Touch “Transfer Contacts”.

2 Touch “Update Contacts”.

3 Transfer the phonebook data to the sys-tem using the Bluetooth® phone.

This operation may be unnecessarydepending on the type of cellular phone.Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring phonebook data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

This screen appears while transferring. Tocancel this function, touch “Cancel”.

If another Bluetooth® device is connectedwhen transferring phonebook data,depending on the phone, the connectedBluetooth® device may need to be discon-nected.

PBAP compatible models automaticdata transfer setting


When a PBAP compatible phone is con-nected, the phone’s phonebook data canbe automatically transferred.

170

2. SETUP

2 Touch “Automatically DownloadContacts” to transfer the phonebookfrom a connected cellular phone.Touch “Automatically Download CallHistory” to transfer the call history froma connected cellular phone.

3 Touch “On”.

4 Touch “Save”.

For PBAP incompatible but OPP com-patible Bluetooth® phones


2 Touch “Replace Contacts” or “AddContacts”.

If the phonebook contains phonebookdata, this screen is displayed.

INFORMATION


phone, the registered image on thephonebook may not appear whenphonebook data is transferred.

171

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

3 Transfer the phonebook data to the sys-tem using a Bluetooth® phone.

Depending on the type of cellular phone,OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring phonebook data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

This screen appears while transferring. Tocancel this function, touch “Cancel”. If“Add Contacts” is touched and there is aninterruption during the transfer of data, thephonebook data transferred until then willbe stored in the system. This is not the casewhen “Cancel” is touched.This operation may be unnecessary

depending on the type of cellular phone.

4 When the transfer is complete, “Done”will appear on the screen. Touch“Done”.


When another Bluetooth® device is cur-rently connected, this screen is displayed.To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.

From “Contacts” screen




4 This screen is displayed. The followingoperations are performed in the samemanner as when they are performedfrom the “Setup” screen.

Phonebooks of PBAP incompatible butOPP compatible phones can also betransferred from the “Contacts” screen.

172

2. SETUP

■ REGISTERING THE PHONE-BOOK DATA

1 Touch “New Contact”.

2 Use the software keyboard to input thename and touch “OK”.

3 Input the phone number and touch“OK”.

To use a tone signal after the phone num-ber, input the tone signal too.

4 Touch the phone type.

5 When 2 or less numbers in total are reg-istered to this contact, this screen is dis-played.

To add a number to this contact, touch“Yes”.

■ EDITING THE PHONEBOOKDATA

The phonebook data can be registered.Up to 3 numbers per person can be reg-istered. New phonebook data cannot beadded for PBAP compatibleBluetooth® phones.

The phone number can be registered in“Phone # 1”, “Phone # 2” and “Phone #3” separately. Phonebooks cannot beedited for PBAP compatibleBluetooth® phones via the navigationsystem.

173

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

1 Touch “Edit Contacts”.

2 Touch the desired data to edit.

3 Touch the desired name or number.

4 Edit the name or the number. (See“REGISTERING THE PHONEBOOKDATA” on page 172.)

5 Touch “Save” when editing is complet-ed.

■ THE “Edit Contact” SCREEN CANALSO BE DISPLAYED

From the “Contact” screen



3 Touch the desired data from the list onthe “Contacts” screen.


5 Touch “Edit”.

174

2. SETUP

From the “Call History” screen


2 Touch “Call History” on the “Phone”screen.

3 Touch the desired number from the liston the “Call History” screen.

4 Touch “Add to Contacts” or “UpdateContact”.

5 If “Update Contact” has been touched,this screen will be displayed. Touch thedesired data from the list.

■ DELETING THE PHONEBOOKDATA

1 Touch “Delete Contacts”.

2 Touch the desired data or “Select All”,then touch “Delete”.

Multiple data can be selected and deletedat the same time.

3 Touch “Yes”.

The data can be deleted.When selling or disposing of the vehicle,delete all your data on the system.For PBAP compatible phones, deletethe phonebook data after setting “Auto-matically Download Contacts” to“Off”. (See “PBAP compatible mod-els automatic data transfer setting” onpage 169.)

175

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

■ ALTERNATIVE PHONEBOOKDATA DELETION METHOD

PBAP incompatible but OPP compatiblemodels






6 Touch “Yes”.




4 Touch “Manage Speed Dials”.


INFORMATION

●When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted, thephonebook data will be deleted at thesame time.

SPEED DIALS SETTING

Speed dials can be registered and delet-ed.

176

2. SETUP

■ THE “Speed Dials” SCREEN CANALSO BE DISPLAYED

From the “Speed Dial” screen


2 Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone”screen.


From the “Contacts” screen




4 Touch “Manage Speed Dials”.

■ REGISTERING THE SPEED DIAL

1 Touch “New”.

2 Touch the desired data to be registered.

Speed dial numbers can be registeredby selecting the desired number fromthe phonebook. Up to 18 numbers perphone can be registered as a speed dial.

177

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

3 Touch the desired phone number.

4 Touch the desired speed dial location.

5 If a location that is already in use istouched, this screen will be displayed.

Touch “Yes” to replace it.

6 When this screen is displayed, the oper-ation is complete.

■ THE SPEED DIAL CAN ALSO BEREGISTERED

From the “Speed Dial” screen


2 Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Phone”screen.

3 Touch “(add new)”.

4 Touch “Yes” to set new speed dial.

5 Touch the desired data to be registered.

178

2. SETUP

6 Touch the desired phone number.

From the “Contact” screen





5 Touch “Set Speed Dial”.


The following operations are performed inthe same manner as when they are per-formed from the “Setup” screen.

■ DELETING THE SPEED DIAL


2 Touch the desired data, or to delete allthe data touch “Select All”, then touch“Delete”.


3 Touch “Yes”.

The speed dial can be deleted.

179

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE




4 Touch “Delete Call History”.

5 Touch the desired history to be deleted.

6 Touch the desired data, or to delete allthe data touch “Select All”, then touch“Delete”.


7 Touch “Yes”.

■ THE CALL HISTORY CAN ALSOBE DELETED




DELETING CALL HISTORY

The call history can be deleted.For PBAP compatible phones, deletethe call history after setting “Automati-cally Download Call History” to “Off”.(See “PBAP compatible models auto-matic data transfer setting” on page169.)

180

2. SETUP


The following operations are performed inthe same manner as when they are per-formed from the “Setup” screen.Other call history can be operated simi-

larly.

Deleting after call history has been dis-played



3 Touch the desired history to be deleted.


5 Touch “Yes”.



3 Touch “Messaging Settings”.


5 Touch “Save” when each setting is com-pleted.

MESSAGE SETTINGS

Message settings can be changed.

181

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE


2 Touch “Messages” on the “Phone”screen.


On this screen, the following functions canbe operated:


THE “Messaging Settings” SCREEN CAN ALSO BE DISPLAYED

SCREEN FOR “Messaging Settings”

No. Function

Touch to set message forwardingfrom cellular phones to “On” or “Off”.

Touch to set the new message notifi-cation display to “On” or “Off”.

Touch to set the new message voicenotification to “On” or “Off”.

Touch to adjust the new message noti-fication volume. (See “NEW MES-SAGE NOTIFICATION VOLUMESETTINGS” on page 182.)

Touch to select a new message voicenotification tone. (See “NEW MES-SAGE NOTIFICATION TONE SET-TINGS” on page 182.)

Touch to set the automatic messageread out function to “On” or “Off”.

Touch to adjust the message read outvolume. (See “MESSAGE READOUT VOLUME SETTINGS” on page183.)

Touch to set the cellular phone’s mes-sage read and unread status updatefunction to “On” or “Off”.

Touch to edit quick reply messages.(See “EDIT QUICK REPLY MES-SAGES” on page 183.)

INFORMATION

●Depending on the phone, these functionsmay not be available.

182

2. SETUP

1 Touch “New Message NotificationVolume”.

2 Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the new mes-sage notification volume.

3 Touch “OK”.

1 Touch “New Message NotificationTone”.

2 Touch the desired new message notifi-cation tone.

New message notification tones can beheard by touching the screen buttons.

3 Touch “OK”.

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION VOLUME SETTINGS

The new message notification volumecan be adjusted.

INFORMATION


NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION TONE SETTINGS

A new message voice notification tonecan be selected.

183

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

1 Touch “Message Readout Volume”.

2 Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the messageread out volume.

3 Touch “OK”.

1 Touch “Edit Quick Reply Messages”.


3 Use the software keyboard to edit themessage.

4 Touch “OK”.

MESSAGE READ OUT VOLUME SETTINGS

Message read out volume can be ad-justed.

INFORMATION


EDIT QUICK REPLY MESSAGES

Quick reply messages can be edited. 15messages have already been stored.

184

2. SETUP

1 Touch “Default”.

2 Touch “Yes”.



3 Touch “Phone Display Settings”.


5 When each setting is completed, touch“Save”.



PHONE DISPLAY SETTINGS

The phone display settings can bechanged.

185

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

On this screen, the following functions canbe operated:


1 Touch “Incoming Call Display Mode”.

2 Touch “Full Screen” or “Drop Down”.

3 Touch “Save”.

SCREEN FOR “Phone Display Settings”

No. Function

Touch to change the incoming calldisplay. (See “INCOMING CALLDISPLAY” on page 185.)

For PBAP compatible models, touchto set the display of the automaticphonebook transfer completionmessage to “On” or “Off”.

For PBAP compatible models, touchto set the display of the automaticcall history transfer completion mes-sage to “On” or “Off”.

For PBAP compatible models, touchto set the display of images duringcalls to “On” or “Off”.

For PBAP compatible models, touchto set the orientation of images dis-played during calls. (See “ROTAT-ING CONTACT IMAGES” onpage 186.)

INFORMATION

●Depending on the phone, these functionsmay not be available even if the phone isPBAP compatible.

INCOMING CALL DISPLAY

The type of incoming call display can beselected.


“Full Screen”

When a call is received,the hands-free screen isdisplayed and it can beoperated on the screen.

“Drop Down”

The message is displayedon the upper side of thescreen and it can only beoperated via the steeringwheel switches.

186

2. SETUP

1 Touch “Rotate Contact Images”.

2 Touch the desired orientation of the im-age to be displayed.

3 Touch “Save”.


2 Touch “Yes”.

ROTATING CONTACT IMAGES

For PBAP compatible models, when“Contact Image for Incoming Calls” isset to “On”, images stored together withphone numbers in the cellular phone’sphonebook will be transferred and dis-played during the incoming call. The ori-entation of the image can be set.



187

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS


2 Touch “Bluetooth*”.



2 Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”screen.

3 Touch “Registered Devices”.



A Bluetooth® device can be set up. REGISTERED DEVICES

A Bluetooth® device can be registered,deleted or set up.

188

2. SETUP

1 Touch “Add New” to register aBluetooth® device to the system.

If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already beenregistered, a registered device needs to bedeleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth®

devices have already been registered” onpage 189.

2 When this screen is displayed, operatethe Bluetooth® device.

Search for the navigation system displayedon the system’s screen using yourBluetooth® device, and register theBluetooth® device.For details about operating the Bluetooth®

device, see the manual that comes with it.A passcode is not required for SSP (Secure

Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth®

devices. Depending on the type ofBluetooth® phone being connected, amessage confirming registration may bedisplayed on the Bluetooth® phone’sscreen. Respond and operate theBluetooth® phone according to the confir-mation message.To cancel the registration, touch “Cancel”.

3 When the connection is completed, thisscreen is displayed.

When using the same device, it is not nec-essary to register it again.

When this screen is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

Bluetooth® devices compatible withphones (HFP) and portable players(AVP) can be registered simultaneous-ly. Phones (HFP) and portable players(AVP) (maximum of 5) can be regis-tered.

189

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

When another Bluetooth® device is cur-rently connected, this screen is displayed.

To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,touch “Yes”.

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-ready been registered

1 When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-ready been registered, a registered de-vice needs to be deleted. Touch “Yes” todelete 1 or more.

2 Touch the device to be deleted, thentouch “Remove”.

3 Touch “Yes”.

1 Touch “Remove”.

2 Touch the desired device, or to deleteall the devices touch “Select All”, thentouch “Remove”.

Multiple devices can be selected anddeleted at the same time.

3 Touch “Yes”.

DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

INFORMATION

●When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, thephonebook data will be deleted at thesame time.

190

2. SETUP

“Device Name”: The name of theBluetooth® device which is displayed onthe screen. It can be changed to a desiredname.

• Even if the device name is changed, thename registered in your Bluetooth®

device does not change.“Device Address”: The device address isunique to each device. It cannot bechanged.

• If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been regis-tered with the same device name, thedevices can be distinguished referring tothe device’s address.

“My Phone Number”: The phone number ofthe Bluetooth® phone is displayed on thescreen. Depending on the type of phone,the phone number may not be displayed.“Profiles”: The compatibility profile of theBluetooth® device is displayed on thescreen.“Connect Portable Player from”: There are2 portable player connection settings avail-able; “Vehicle” and “Portable Player”.

■ CHANGING A DEVICE NAME

1 Touch “Details”.

2 Touch the device to be edited.

3 Touch “Device Name”.

EDITING THE Bluetooth® DEVICE

The Bluetooth® device’s informationcan be displayed on the screen. The dis-played information can also be edited.

191

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

4 Use the software keyboard to input thedevice name and touch “OK”.

5 Confirm the device name and touch“OK”.

■ SETTING PORTABLE PLAYERCONNECTION METHOD

1 Touch “Connect Portable Playerfrom”.

2 Touch the desired connection method.

“Vehicle”: Touch to connect the audio sys-tem to the portable player.“Portable Player”: Touch to connect theportable player to the audio system.Depending on the portable player, the

“Vehicle” or “Portable Player” connectionmethod may be best. As such, refer to themanual that comes with the portable player.

3 Touch “OK”.

192

2. SETUP



3 Touch “Connect Phone”.

4 Touch the phone to be connected.

The indicator of the selected Bluetooth®

phone will turn on.



SELECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE

If more than 1 Bluetooth® phone hasbeen registered, it is necessary to selectwhich phone to connect to.It is possible to select from up to 5 regis-tered Bluetooth® devices (Phones(HFP) and portable players (AVP)(maximum of 5) can be registered.)

Although up to 5 Bluetooth® phonescan be registered in the system, only 1Bluetooth® phone can function at atime.

If the desired Bluetooth® phone is not onthe list, touch “Add New” to register thephone. (See page 188.)

The currently connected Bluetooth®

phone’s screen button will have aBluetooth® mark displayed on it. If thecurrently connected Bluetooth® phone’sscreen button is touched, the Bluetooth®

phone can be disconnected. Touch “Yes”to disconnect.

193

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

6 When the result message is displayed,the Bluetooth® phone can be used.

When a phone is connected whileBluetooth® audio is playing

This screen is displayed, and theBluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.


When another Bluetooth® device is cur-rently connected, this screen is displayed.To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,touch “Yes”.



3 Touch “Connect Portable Player”.


SELECTING PORTABLE PLAYER

If more than 1 portable player has beenregistered, it is necessary to select whichportable player to connect to.It is possible to select from up to 5 regis-tered Bluetooth® devices (Phones(HFP) and portable players (AVP)(maximum of 5) can be registered.)Although up to 5 portable players canbe registered in the system, only 1 porta-ble player can function at a time.

194

2. SETUP

4 Touch the desired portable player to beconnected.

The indicator of the selected portableplayer will turn on.


6 When the result message is displayed,the portable player can be used.


When another Bluetooth® device is cur-rently connected, this screen is displayed.To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.

If the desired portable player is not on thelist, touch “Add New” to register the por-table player. (See page 188.)The currently connected portable

player’s screen button will have aBluetooth® mark displayed on it. If thecurrently connected portable player’sscreen button is touched, the portableplayer can be disconnected. Touch “Yes”to disconnect.

195

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE



3 Touch “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings”.


The information displays the followingitems:

If it is desirable to change the settings, referto the following pages.When the settings have been changed,

touch “Save”.*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

DETAILED Bluetooth® SETTINGS

The Bluetooth® settings can be con-firmed and changed.

Screen button/Screen item Information

“Device Name”

This name will be dis-played on the devicewhen it is connected. Itcan be changed to a de-sired name.

“Passcode”

The password that wasset when the Bluetooth®

device was registeredcan be changed.

Device Address

The device address isunique to each device. Itcannot be changed.

Profiles

The compatibility profileof the Bluetooth® deviceis displayed on thescreen. (See pages 140and 257.)

196

2. SETUP

■ CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”

When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On”:

The Bluetooth® device is automaticallyconnected when the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-TION ON mode.When “Bluetooth* Power” is “Off”: The Bluetooth® device is disconnected,and the system will not connect to it nexttime.The “Bluetooth* Power” auto connection

state can be set on or off.• “On”: The auto connection is turned on.• “Off”: The auto connection is turned off.The auto connection state cannot be

changed from “On” to “Off” while driving,but it can be changed from “Off” to “On”.

1 Touch “Bluetooth* Power”.


3 Touch “Save”. In the event the state of “Bluetooth*

Power” is changed from “Off” to “On”,Bluetooth® connection will begin.

■ EDITING THE DEVICE NAME

1 Touch “Device Name”.

2 Use the software keyboard to input thedevice name and touch “OK”.

3 Touch “Save”.*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

CHANGING THE Bluetooth® SETTINGS

The Bluetooth® settings can bechanged according to the following pro-cedures.

The “Bluetooth* Power” display showsthe following state.

197

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

■ EDITING THE PASSCODE

1 Touch “Passcode”.

2 Input a passcode and touch “OK”.

3 Touch “Save”.

■ Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNEC-TION STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS

1 Touch “Display Phone Status” or“Display Portable Player Status”.

2 Touch “On”.

3 Touch “Save”.*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On” andthe “ENGINE START STOP” switch isin ACCESSORY or IGNITION ONmode, the Bluetooth® phone and porta-ble player’s connection status can bedisplayed. (See “CHANGING“Bluetooth* Power”” on page 196.)

198

2. SETUP


2 Touch “Yes”. If the state of “Bluetooth* Power” is

changed from “Off” into “On”, Bluetooth®

connection will begin.*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

INITIALIZING THE Bluetooth® SETTINGS


199

2. SETUP

4

PHO

NE

200

1. QUICK REFERENCE ........................... 202

2. SOME BASICS........................................ 204

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM...................... 205

AUDIO SPLIT SCREEN DISPLAY ............... 205

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF ..................................................... 205

MUTING AND PAUSING THE SYSTEM ....................................................... 205

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS ....................................................... 206

DSP CONTROL..................................................... 206

TONE AND BALANCE...................................... 207

SELECTING SCREEN SIZE ............................. 207

DVD PLAYER.......................................................... 208

AUX PORT ............................................................... 209

USB PORT................................................................. 209

3. RADIO OPERATION............................. 210

LISTENING TO THE RADIO ............................ 210

PRESETTING A STATION ................................. 210

SELECTING A STATION ..................................... 211

RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM ........ 211

TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT ........................ 212

4. HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY INFORMATION .................................... 213

USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.......... 213

AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.................................................. 214

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...................... 215

1 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

5

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

5

201

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite Radio BROADCAST) .......................... 217

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio.......................................................... 217

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID .......................... 217

LISTENING TO SATELLITE RADIO ............. 218

CHANNEL CATEGORY ................................... 218

PRESETTING A CHANNEL.............................. 218

SELECTING A CHANNEL................................ 219

DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND NAME........ 219

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS ............................................ 220

6. RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET RADIO BROADCAST) ..................... 222

LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO............. 222

7. DVD PLAYER OPERATION.............. 223

INSERTING A DISC.............................................. 223

EJECTING A DISC ................................................ 223

PLAYING A DISC.................................................. 224

PLAYING AN AUDIO DISC ........................... 224

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA DISC .................. 226

OPERATING A DVD DISC .............................. 229

PLAYING A DVD DISC..................................... 230

DVD OPTIONS....................................................... 232

IF THE PLAYER MALFUNCTIONS .............. 241

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISC INFORMATION................................................... 241

8. USB MEMORY OPERATION........... 244

CONNECTING A USB MEMORY.............. 244

PLAYING A USB MEMORY .......................... 245

9. iPod OPERATION.................................. 250

CONNECTING iPod .......................................... 250

PLAYING iPod MUSIC ........................................ 251

PLAYING iPod VIDEO....................................... 254

10. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION......................................... 257

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER .................................................................... 261

PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO....................... 263

11. AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE CONTROLS (STEERING SWITCHES) .................. 268

12. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS .......................... 270

RADIO RECEPTION........................................... 270

iPod.................................................................................. 271

USB MEMORY........................................................ 272

CARING FOR YOUR DVD PLAYER AND DISC .............................................................. 272

MP3/WMA FILES .................................................. 274

CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS .............................. 276

TERMS .......................................................................... 276

1. AUDIO SETTINGS ................................. 280

HD Radio™ SYSTEM SETTINGS................... 280

iPod SETTINGS......................................................... 281

2 SETUP

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

202

1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

Operations such as selecting a preset station and adjusting the sound balance are car-ried out on the screen. Press the “AUDIO” button to display the audio/video screen.If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed, the “Mark Levinson” logo is shownon the panel.

203


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM


Function menu tab Touch the screen tabs to select the desired audiomode. 206

Function menu display screen

Use this screen to control the selected audiomode. 206

“SETUP” button Press to display the “Setup” screen. 280

Disc slot Insert discs into the slot. 223

“TUNE·SCROLL”knob

Turn to step up and step down the station band,change to the next or previous satellite radiochannel, or skip to the next or previous track,DVD chapter, etc. Also, the knob can be used toenter selections on the track/file and album/fold-er screens by pressing it.

210, 218, 224, 226, 231, 247, 252, 263

“ ” button Press to mute/unmute or pause/resume the cur-rent operation. 205

“PRST·TRACK”button

Press the “ ” or “ ” button to preset up or downfor a station or channel, or to change a desiredtrack, file or chapter.Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button to seek up ordown for a station or channel, or to fast forward-ing/rewinding for a track, file or chapter.

211, 219, 224, 227, 231, 247,

252, 255, 263

“ ” button Press to eject a disc. 223

“PWR·VOL” knob Press to turn the audio/video system on and off,and turn to adjust the volume. 205

“AUDIO” button Press to display the audio control screen. 205

204


2. SOME BASICS

This section describes some of the basicfeatures of the audio/video system.Some information may not pertain toyour system.Your audio/video system works whenthe “ENGINE START STOP” switch isturned to ACCESSORY or IGNITIONON mode.

CAUTION

●For vehicles sold in U.S.A.:Part 15 of the FCC RulesFCC WARNING: Changes ormodifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

●Laser products• USE OF CONTROL OR

ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCEOF PROCEDURES OTHER THANTHOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAYRESULT IN HAZARDOUSRADIATION EXPOSURE.

• THE USE OF OPTICALINSTRUMENTS WITH THISPRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYEHAZARD.

NOTICE

●To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the audio/videosystem on longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

205


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

“AUDIO” button: Press to display screenbuttons for the audio/video system.“PWR·VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/video system on and off. Turn this knob toadjust the volume. The system turns on inthe last mode used.

“ ” button: Press to mute/unmute orpause/resume the current operation.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Press this switch to operate the voicecommand system.

For the operation of the voice commandsystem and its list of commands, seepages 298 and 307.

AUDIO SPLIT SCREEN DISPLAY

The audio split screen can be displayedwhile the map screen is displayed. Fordetails, see page 41.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

A function that enables automatic returnto the previous screen from the audio/video screen can be selected. See page46 for details.

MUTING AND PAUSING THE SYSTEM

206


1 Each time the “AUDIO” button ispressed, the audio mode changes.

The audio mode changes in the followingorder:• “AM”, “FM”, “DISC”, “USB”/“iPod”, “BT

Audio” and “AUX”

1 Press the “AUDIO” button.

2 Touch .

3 Touch the “DSP” tab to display thisscreen.

4 Touch the desired items to be set.

5 Touch “OK”.

1 Touch “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.


SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Up to 4 tabs can be displayed on thescreen. Touch or , located eitherside of the screen tabs, to display tabsfrom the previous or next page.The desired audio mode can be found by

touching or and then selectingthat audio mode tab.

INFORMATION

●If a disc is not inserted, the DVD playercannot be turned on.

●The DVD player can be turned off byejecting a disc.

●When audio mode is selected, therespective screen buttons are displayedon the screen.

●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be oper-ated.

DSP CONTROL

AUTOMATIC SOUND LEVELIZER (ASL)

The system adjusts to the optimum vol-ume and tone quality according to vehi-cle speed to compensate for increasedvehicle noise.

207


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

1 Touch “Surround”.


1 Touch the “Sound” tab to display thisscreen.


3 Touch “OK”.


2 Touch the “DISC” tab.

SURROUND FUNCTION

This function can create a feeling ofpresence.

TONE AND BALANCE

TONE

How good an audio program sounds islargely determined by the mix of the tre-ble, mid and bass levels. In fact, differentkinds of music and vocal programs usu-ally sound better with different mixes oftreble, mid and bass.

BALANCE

A good balance of the left and right ste-reo channels and of the front and rearsound levels is also important.Keep in mind that when listening to a ste-reo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase thevolume of 1 group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.


“Treble”“+” or “-”

Touch to adjust high-pitched tones.

“Mid”“+” or “-”

Touch to adjust mid-pitched tones.

“Bass”“+” or “-”

Touch to adjust low-pitched tones.

“Front” or “Rear”

Touch to adjust thesound balance betweenthe front and rearspeakers.

“L” or “R”

Touch to adjust thesound balance betweenthe left and right speak-ers.

INFORMATION

●The tone of each mode (such as AM, FMand DVD player) can be adjusted.

SELECTING SCREEN SIZE

Before selecting screen size, it is neces-sary to insert a DVD disc and selectDISC mode.

208



4 Touch “Wide”.


When is touched, the previousscreen is displayed.

6 Touch “Save”.

1 When inserting a disc, gently insert thedisc with the label facing up.

No. Function

Touch to display a 4 : 3 screen, witheither side in black.

Touch to widen the 4 : 3 screen hori-zontally to fill the screen.

Touch to widen the 4 : 3 screen verti-cally and horizontally, by the same ra-tio, to fill the screen.

DVD PLAYER

NOTICE

●Never try to disassemble or oil any part ofthe DVD player. Do not insert anythingother than a disc into the slot.

INFORMATION

●The player is intended for use with 4.7 in.(12 cm) discs only.

209


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

1 Press the “AUDIO” button to displaythe audio control screen and touch the“AUX” tab or press the “AUDIO” but-ton repeatedly to change to AUXmode.

1 Press the “AUDIO” button to displaythe audio control screen and touch the“USB” or “iPod” tab or press the“AUDIO” button repeatedly to changeto USB memory or iPod mode.

AUX PORT

The sound of portable audio playersconnected to the AUX port can be en-joyed. For details, refer to “Owner’sManual”.

CAUTION

●Do not connect portable audio device oroperate the controls while driving.

NOTICE

●Depending on the size and shape of theportable audio device that is connectedto the system, the armrest may not closefully. In this case, do not forcibly close thearmrest as this may damage the portableaudio device or the terminal, etc.

●Do not leave portable audio device in thevehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-cle may become high, resulting in dam-age to the player.

●Do not push down on or apply unneces-sary pressure to the portable audiodevice while it is connected as this maydamage the portable audio device or itsterminal.

●Do not insert foreign objects into the portas this may damage the portable audiodevice or its terminal.

INFORMATION

●When the portable audio player is notconnected to the AUX port, the tab willbe dimmed.

USB PORT

A USB memory/iPod can be connectedto the USB port. For details, see “CON-NECTING A USB MEMORY” on page244 and “CONNECTING iPod” onpage 250.

INFORMATION

●When a USB memory/iPod is not con-nected with the USB port, the tab will bedimmed.

210


3. RADIO OPERATION


2 Touch the “AM”, “FM”, “SAT” or “Apps”tab or press the “AUDIO” button re-peatedly to select the desired tab.

1 Turn the knob clockwise to step up thestation band or counterclockwise tostep down.

1 Tune in the desired station.

2 Touch one of the left side screen buttons(1-6) and hold it until a beep is heard.This sets the frequency to the screenbutton. The station’s frequency will bedisplayed in the screen button.

To change the preset station to a differentone, follow the same procedure.

LISTENING TO THE RADIO

SELECTING A RADIO STATION

STEP UP AND DOWN THE STATION BAND

INFORMATION

●The radio automatically changes to ste-reo reception when a stereo broadcast isreceived.

PRESETTING A STATION

Radio mode has a mix preset function,which can store up to 36 stations (6 sta-tions per page x 6 pages) from any of theAM, FM or SAT bands.

211


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

Preset tuning: Touch one of the mix presetchannels on the left side of the screen orpress the “ ” or “ ” button of“PRST·TRACK” to select the desired sta-tion. The screen button is highlighted andthe station frequency appears on thescreen.Seek tuning: Press and hold the “ ” or “ ”button of “PRST·TRACK”. The radio willbegin seeking up or down for a station of thenearest frequency and will stop when a sta-tion is found. Each time the button ispressed, the stations will be searched auto-matically one after another.To scan all the frequencies: Touch“SCAN”. “SCAN” will appear on thescreen. The radio will find the next stationand stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or “HDOnly” is selected, or 5 seconds if “Analog”is selected, and then scan again. To staytuned to a station and stop the scanning,touch “SCAN” again. (To set HD Radio™system, see page 280.)


SELECTING A STATION

Tune in the desired station using one ofthe following methods.

RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM

This audio system is equipped with Ra-dio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).RBDS mode allows text messages to bereceived from radio stations that utilizeRBDS transmitters.When RBDS is on, the radio can— only select stations of a particular pro-gram type,— display messages from radio stations,— search for a stronger signal station.RBDS features are available only whenlistening to an FM station thatbroadcasts RBDS information and the“FM info” indicator is on.

SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE

212


2 Touch “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to moveforward and backward through the pro-gram list.

Once a program type has been set, “TYPESEEK” will appear on the screen.The program list is in the following order:

• Classical• Country• EasyLis (Easy Listening)• Inform (Information)• Jazz• News• Oldies• Other• Pop Music• Religion• Rock• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)• Sports• Talk• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio

Settings” are set to analog.)• Alert (Emergency Alert)

3 Touch “TYPE SEEK” and the systemwill start to seek for stations in the rele-vant program type.

“Traffic”: Touch to seek a traffic programstation. “TRAF SEEK” will appear on thescreen.

INFORMATION

●If no relevant program can be found, “notype” will appear on the screen.

TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT

A station that regularly broadcasts traf-fic information is automatically located.

INFORMATION

●If no traffic program station is found, “NoTraffic” will appear on the screen.

●If a traffic program station is found, thename of the traffic program station will bedisplayed for a while.

213


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

4. HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY INFORMATION


2 Touch the “AM” or “FM” tab or pressthe “AUDIO” button repeatedly to se-lect the desired tab.

As a user works through the analog radiostations, (where applicable) the radioreceiver will automatically tune from ananalog signal to a digital signal within 5 sec-onds. An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be dis-

played on the screen when in digital. The“HD)” logo will first appear in a gray colorindicating the station is indeed (an analogand) a digital station. Once the digital sig-nal is acquired, the logo will change to abright orange color.The song title, artist name and music genre

will appear on the screen when available bythe radio station.

3 This screen will be displayed if“Options” is touched.

HD Radio™ Technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yourradio product has a special receiverwhich allows it to receive digital broad-casts (where available) in addition to theanalog broadcasts it already receives.Digital broadcasts have better soundquality than analog broadcasts as digitalbroadcasts provide free, crystal clearaudio with no static or distortion. Formore information, and a guide to avail-able radio stations and programming,refer to www.hdradio.com.

USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY

214


When “Text” is touched, information suchas the artist name, song title, album title andmusic genre of the track being listened toare displayed on the text screen. To displaymessages from the station, touch “Addi-tional Information”.When “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” is touched, a

program type will be searched. Once aprogram type has been set, “TYPE SEEK”will appear on the screen. (See “SELECT-ING A DESIRED TYPE” on page 211.)

1 Touch “Multicast”.

Each time “Multicast” is touched, the sup-plemental program changes. If “Multicast” is touched when tuned to the

last of the supplemental programs, the mainprogram will be returned to.

1 Touch “Tag” to bookmark the music in-formation.

2 Open the cover and connect iPod usingan iPod cable.

Turn on the power of the iPod if it is notturned on.Once an iPod is connected, the music tag

moves from the radio into the iPod.When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the

“tagged” information of the songs whichwere tagged while listening to the radio canbe viewed. Then a user may decide to pur-chase the song or CD/Album which hadbeen listened to on their radio.


AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY

MULTICAST

On the FM radio frequency most digitalstations have “multiple” or supplementalprograms on one FM station.

TAG

INFORMATION

●If tagging the music information fails,“Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will bedisplayed on the screen. If this occurs, tagthe information again.

●HD Radio™ stations can be preset.

215


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Experience Cause Action

Mismatch of time align-ment- a user may hear ashort period of program-ming replayed or an echo,stutter or skip.

The radio stations analogand digital volume is notproperly aligned or the sta-tion is in ballgame mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. Auser can contact the radio station.

Sound fades, blending inand out.

Radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.

Reception issue, may clear-up asthe vehicle continues to be driven.Touching “Analog” can force radioin an analog audio.

Audio mute conditionwhen an HD2/HD3 multi-cast channel had been play-ing.

The radio does not have ac-cess to digital signals at themoment.

This is normal behavior, wait untilthe digital signal returns. If out ofthe coverage area, seek a new sta-tion.

Audio mute delay when se-lecting an HD2/HD3 mul-ticast channel preset.

The digital multicast con-tent is not available until HDRadio™ broadcast can bedecoded and make the au-dio available. This takes upto 7 seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for theaudio to become available.

Text information does notmatch the present song au-dio.

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.

No text information shownfor the present selected fre-quency.

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.

216


HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity DigitalCorporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

217


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

5. RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite Radio BROADCAST)

If “Ch 000” is selected using the“TUNE·SCROLL” knob, the ID code,which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will bedisplayed. If another channel is selected,the ID code will no longer be displayed.The channel (000) alternates between dis-playing the radio ID and the specific radiocode.

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast inthe vehicle, a subscription to the XMSatellite Radio service is necessary.An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner de-signed exclusively to receive broadcastsprovided under a separate subscription.Availability is limited to the 48 contigu-ous U.S. states and some Canadianprovinces.

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE

It is necessary to enter into a separateservice agreement with XM SatelliteRadio in order to receive satellite broad-cast programming in the vehicle. Addi-tional activation and servicesubscription fees apply that are not in-cluded in the purchase price of the vehi-cle and digital satellite tuner.

For complete information on subscrip-tion rates and terms, or to subscribe toXM Satellite Radio:

U.S.A.Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987.

CanadaRefer to www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.

INFORMATION

●XM Satellite Radio is solely responsiblefor the quality, availability and content ofthe satellite radio services provided,which are subject to the terms and condi-tions of the XM Satellite Radio customerservice agreement.

●Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tun-ing to “Ch 000” on the radio. For details,see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID”below.

●All fees and programming are theresponsibility of XM Satellite Radio andare subject to change.

SATELLITE TUNER TECHNOLOGY NOTICE

Lexus’s satellite radio tuners are award-ed Type Approval Certificates from XMSatellite Radio Inc. as proof of compati-bility with the services offered by XMSatellite Radio.

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID

Each XM tuner is identified with aunique radio ID. The radio ID is requiredwhen activating an XM service or whenreporting a problem.

218



2 Touch the “SAT” tab or press the“AUDIO” button repeatedly until the“SAT” tab is selected.

3 Turn the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob to se-lect the next or previous channel.

Turning the knob quickly allows rapidscrolling through the channel list.

1 Touch either “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” togo to the next or previous category.

1 Tune in the desired channel.

2 Touch one of the left side screen buttons(1-6) and hold it until a beep is heard.This sets the frequency to the screenbutton. The channel number will be dis-played in the screen button.

To change the preset channel to a differentone, follow the same procedure.

LISTENING TO SATELLITE RADIO

CHANNEL CATEGORY

PRESETTING A CHANNEL

219


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

Preset tuning: Touch the channel selectorscreen button (1-6) or press the “ ” or “ ”button of “PRST·TRACK” to listen to thedesired channel. The selected screen but-ton (1-6) is highlighted and its related infor-mation appears on the right side of thescreen.To select a channel within the current cate-gory: Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” buttonof “PRST·TRACK”. The radio will changeup or down to a channel within the currentchannel category.

To scan the currently selected channel cat-egory: Touch “SCAN”. “SCAN” appearson the screen. The radio will find the nextchannel in the same channel category, staythere for a few seconds, and then scanagain. To select a channel, touch “SCAN”again.

1 Touch “Text” to display additional infor-mation other than the artist name andsong title currently being listening to.

SELECTING A CHANNEL

Tune in the desired channel using one ofthe following methods.

DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND NAME

INFORMATION

●Up to 64 alphanumeric characters canbe displayed. (Some information will notbe fully displayed.)

●If there is no additional information, “-----”will be displayed.

220


IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS

When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer-ring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.

Message Explanation

Ck Antenna

The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antennacable is attached securely.

A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna ca-ble. See a Lexus certified dealer for assistance.

Ch Unauth

You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is beingupdated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radiofor subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you canchoose “Ch 000” and all free-to-air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”.If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listento the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.

No Signal The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your ve-hicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

Loading The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unithas received the information.

Ch Off Air The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Se-lect another channel.

----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated withthe channel at that time. No action is required.

Ch UnavailThe channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 sec-onds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”. If itdoes not change automatically, select another channel.

INFORMATION

●Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677(Canada).

221


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

NOTICE

●This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.Le présent appareil est conforme auxCNR d’Industrie Canada applicables auxappareils radio exempts de licence.L’exploitation est autorisée aux deuxconditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doitpas produire de brouillage, et (2)l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit acceptertout brouillage radioélectrique subi,même si le brouillage est susceptible d’encompromettre le fonctionnement.

INFORMATION

●This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”(Music and Talk) of only XM SatelliteRadio and “Text Information*” linked tothe respective “Audio Services”.*: Text Information includes, Station

Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.

222


6. RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET RADIO BROADCAST)


2 Touch the “Apps” tab or press the“AUDIO” button repeatedly until the“Apps” tab is selected.

If a compatible phone is already registered,it will be connected automatically. If a compatible phone has not been regis-

tered or the Bluetooth® connection cannotbe completed correctly, touch “Connect”to register and/or connect your phone.(See page 187.)When connection is complete, the applica-

tion screen can be displayed.

3 Touch “View Application Screen”.The internet radio application screen is dis-

played.Perform operations according to the dis-

played application screen.By pressing the “AUDIO” button, the audio

control screen can be returned to.

*: For details, refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink or call 1-800-255-3987.

LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO

One of Apps’s features is the ability tolisten to internet radio. In order to usethis service, an Apps compatible phoneand the navigation system needs to beset. For details, refer to “APPS”. (Seepage 346.)

INFORMATION

●Other applications can be activatedwhile listening to internet radio.

●An iPhone cannot be connected viaBluetooth® and USB connection at thesame time. However, it is possible torecharge an iPhone while using Apps byconnecting via USB. The system uses theconnection method that was used last.Therefore, if connected via USB afterBluetooth® connection, it is necessary toreconnect the iPhone via Bluetooth®.

●Services requiring a separate contractcan also be used.*

●Some parts of “Apps” can be adjustedusing the switches on the steering wheel.

●If internet radio has never been listenedto by activating “Apps” from the “Informa-tion” screen, the “Apps” tab will bedimmed.

223


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

7. DVD PLAYER OPERATION

1 Insert a disc into the disc slot.

After insertion, the disc is automaticallyloaded.

1 Press the “ ” button and remove thedisc.

For safety reasons, the DVD video discscan only be viewed when the followingconditions are met:(a) The vehicle is completely stopped.(b) The “ENGINE START STOP”

switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-TION ON mode.

(c) The parking brake is applied. While driving in DVD video mode, onlythe DVD’s audio can be heard.

INSERTING A DISC

EJECTING A DISC

INFORMATION

●If a disc is inserted with the label facingdown, it cannot be played.

224


1 Press the “AUDIO” button if a disc hasalready been loaded in the disc slot.

2 Touch the “DISC” tab or press the“AUDIO” button repeatedly until the“DISC” tab is selected.


When CD-TEXT information exists, thename and artist of the CD currently beinglistened to will be displayed.

: Touch to pause the track. : Touch to resume playing the track.

■ ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedlyuntil the desired track number appears onthe screen. The player will start playing theselected track from the beginning.“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to skip tothe desired track.

PLAYING A DISC PLAYING AN AUDIO DISC

SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK

225


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

■ ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN

1 Touch the track name screen button todisplay the CD’s track list.

2 Touch the desired track number. Theplayer will start playing the selectedtrack from the beginning.

, : Touch to move the list up or down by5 track groups. If either of these screen but-tons is touched when the top/bottom pageof the list is displayed, the last/first page isdisplayed.“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scrollthrough the track list one by one. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to quicklyscroll up or down the track list. To select thedesired track, press the knob.

, : If appears to the right of an itemname, the complete name is too long for thescreen. Touch to scroll to the end of thename. Touch to move to the beginning ofthe name.

■ FAST FORWARDING OR RE-WINDING

1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-wind the disc.

When the button is released, the playerresumes playing from that position.

■ REPEATING A TRACK

1 Touch “RPT” while the track is playing.

“RPT” appears on the screen. When thetrack is finished, the player will automati-cally play it again. To cancel this function,touch “RPT” again.

REPEATING

The track currently being listened to canbe repeated.

226


■ PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THEDISC IN RANDOM ORDER

1 Touch “RAND” while the disc is playing.

Once “RAND” appears on the screen, thesystem selects a track randomly from thedisc currently being listened to. To cancelthis function, touch “RAND” again.


The file name, folder name and artist namecurrently being listened to and the disc iconare displayed on the screen.

: Touch to pause the file.: Touch to resume playing the file.


, : Touch to skip to the next or previousfolder.

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks or albums can be automaticallyand randomly selected.

INFORMATION

●If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title ofthe disc and track will be displayed. Up to32 characters can be displayed.

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA DISC

SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER

227


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

■ ON THE FOLDER LIST SCREEN

1 Touch the folder name screen button todisplay the following folder list screen.

2 Touch the desired folder number to dis-play the folder’s file list. From the file list,select the desired file number.

, : Touch to move the list up or down by5 folder groups. If either of these screenbuttons is touched when the top/bottompage of the list is displayed, the last/firstpage is displayed.“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to quicklyscroll up or down the folder list. To selectthe desired folder, press the knob.



1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-wind the file.



“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedlyuntil the desired file number appears on thescreen. The player will start playing the se-lected file from the beginning.“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to skip tothe desired file.

SELECTING A DESIRED FILE

228


■ ON THE FILE LIST SCREEN

1 Touch the file name screen button todisplay the following file list screen.

2 Touch the desired file number. The play-er will start playing the selected file fromthe beginning.

, : Touch to move the list up or down by5 file groups. If either of these screen but-tons is touched when the top/bottom pageof the list is displayed, the last/first page isdisplayed.“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scrollthrough the file list one by one.“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to quicklyscroll up or down the file list. To select thedesired file, press the knob.



1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-wind the file.


■ REPEATING A FILE

1 Touch “RPT” while the file is playing.

REPEATING

The file or folder currently being listenedto can be repeated.

229


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

Each time “RPT” is touched, the modechanges as follows:

When “RAND” is off• File Repeat Folder Repeat Off

When “RAND” is on• File RepeatOff “RPT” appears on the screen. When the file

is finished, the player will automatically playit again. To cancel this function, touch“RPT” repeatedly until the repeat modeturns off.

■ REPEATING A FOLDER

1 Touch “RPT” repeatedly until“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.

When the folder is finished, the player willautomatically go back to the beginning ofthe folder and play it again. To cancel thisfunction, touch “RPT” again.

■ PLAYING FILES FROM ONEFOLDER IN RANDOM ORDER

1 Touch “RAND” while the disc is playing.

Each time “RAND” is touched, the modechanges as follows:• Random (1 Folder Random)

Folder Random (1 Disc Random) OffOnce “RAND” appears on the screen, the

system selects a file randomly from thefolder currently being listened to. To cancelthis function, touch “RAND” repeatedlyuntil the random mode turns off.

■ PLAYING THE FILES IN ALL THEFOLDERS ON THE DISC IN RAN-DOM ORDER

1 Touch “RAND” repeatedly until“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.

Once “FLD.RAND” appears on the screen,the system selects a file randomly from allof the existing folders. To cancel this func-tion, touch “RAND” again.

RANDOM ORDER

Files or folders can be automatically andrandomly selected.

INFORMATION

●When a file is skipped or the system isinoperative, touch “RAND” to reset.

OPERATING A DVD DISC

The playback condition of some DVDdiscs may be determined by the DVDsoftware producer. This DVD playerplays a disc as the software producer in-tended. As such some functions may notwork properly. Be sure to read the in-struction manual that comes with the in-dividual DVD disc. For detailedinformation about DVD video discs, see“DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEODISC INFORMATION” on page 241.

230


1 Press the “AUDIO” button if a disc hasalready been loaded in the disc slot.

2 Touch the “DISC” tab or press the“AUDIO” button repeatedly until the“DISC” tab is selected.

Touch “Options” on the “DVD” screen,then touch “Wide” on the “DVD Options”screen. The screen mode can be changed. If “Full Screen” is touched when the vehicle

is completely stopped and the parkingbrake is applied, the video screen returns.

PRECAUTIONS ON DVD VIDEO DISC

When recording with a DVD video, au-dio tracks may not record in some caseswhile the menu is displayed. As audiowill not play in this case, verify that thevideo tracks are playing and then acti-vate playback.When playback of a disc is completed:If an audio CD or MP3/WMA disc isplaying, the first track or file starts.If a DVD video is playing, playback willstop or the menu screen will be dis-played.The title/chapter number and playbacktime display may not appear while play-ing back certain DVD video discs.

CAUTION

●Conversational speech on some DVDs isrecorded at a low volume to emphasizethe impact of sound effects. If you adjustthe volume assuming that the conversa-tions represent the maximum volumelevel that the DVD will play, you may bestartled by louder sound effects or whenyou change to a different audio source.The louder sounds may have a significantimpact on the human body or pose a driv-ing hazard. Keep this in mind when youadjust the volume.

PLAYING A DVD DISC

231


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

If is touched, while watching a DVD, theDVD controls will appear.

■ CHANGING A CHAPTER

1 Press the “ ” or “ ” button of“PRST·TRACK” or turn the“TUNE·SCROLL” knob to change thechapter.

DISPLAYING DVD CONTROLS

INFORMATION

●If appears on the screen when a con-trol is touched, the operation relevant tothe control is not permitted.

DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO CONTROLS


“Top Menu”, “Menu”

Touch to display the menuscreen for DVD video.

The menu control key ap-pears on the screen. (Seepage 231.)

Touch to pause the videoscreen.

Touch to rewind duringplayback.

Touch to stop the videoscreen.

Touch to resume normalplay during pause.

Touch to fast forward dur-ing playback and forwardframe by frame duringpause.

232


1 Select the menu item using , , or and touch “Enter”. The

player starts playing the disc from thestart of the selected item.

When is touched, the previousscreen is displayed.




SELECTING A MENU ITEM

INFORMATION

●According to the DVD disc, some menuitems can be selected directly. (Fordetails, see the manual that comes withthe DVD disc provided separately.)

DVD OPTIONS

No. Function Page

Touch to display the titlesearch screen. 233

Touch to display the prede-termined scene on thescreen and start playing.

Touch to display the audioselection screen. 233

Touch to display the subtitleselection screen. 233

Touch to display the angleselection screen. 233

Touch to display the screenmode screen. 207

Touch to display the imagequality adjustment screen. 234

Touch to display the initialsetup screen. 235

233


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

1 Touch “Search” on the “DVD Options”screen.

2 Enter the title number and touch “OK”.

The player starts playing video for that titlenumber. If the wrong numbers are entered, touch

to delete the numbers.When is touched, the previous

screen is displayed.

1 Touch “Audio” on the “DVD Options”screen.

2 Each time “Change” is touched, the au-dio language is changed.

The languages available are restricted tothose available on the DVD disc.When is touched, the previous


1 Touch “Subtitle” on the “DVD Options”screen.

2 Each time “Change” is touched, the lan-guage the subtitles are displayed in ischanged.

The languages available are restricted tothose available on the DVD disc.When “Hide” is touched, the subtitles can

be hidden.When is touched, the previous


1 Touch “Angle” on the “DVD Options”screen.

SEARCHING BY TITLE

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

CHANGING THE ANGLE

The angle can be selected for discs thatare multi-angle compatible when the an-gle mark appears on the screen.

234


2 Each time “Change” is touched, the an-gle is changed.

The angles available are restricted to thoseavailable on the DVD disc.When is touched, the previous


■ CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COL-OR AND TONE ADJUSTMENT

1 Touch “Display” on the “DVD Options”screen.

2 Touch “ ” or “ ” to display the desireditem to be adjusted.

3 After adjusting the screen, touch “OK”.The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is

touched. To turn the screen back on, pressany button. The selected screen appears.

AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT

The brightness, contrast, color and toneof the screen can be adjusted. In addi-tion, the display can be turned off andthe screen can be changed to either dayor night mode.


“Contrast” “+” Touch to strengthen thecontrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-” Touch to weaken thecontrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+” Touch to brighten thescreen.

“Brightness” “-” Touch to darken thescreen.

“Color” “R” Touch to strengthen thered color of the screen.

“Color” “G”Touch to strengthen thegreen color of thescreen.

“Tone” “+” Touch to strengthen thetone of the screen.

“Tone” “-” Touch to weaken thetone of the screen.

235


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

1 Touch “DVD Settings” on the “DVDOptions” screen.


3 After the initial setting has beenchanged, touch “Save”.

This screen will close, and the system willreturn to the previous screen.When “Default” is touched, all menus are

initialized.

■ AUDIO LANGUAGE

1 Touch “Audio Language” on the “DVDSettings” screen.

2 Touch the desired language to be heardon the “Audio Language” screen.

If the desired language to be heard cannotbe found on this screen, touch “Other” andenter a language code. For entry of a lan-guage code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTI-TLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” onpage 237.To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,

touch .

3 Touch “Save” on the “DVD Settings”screen.

■ SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

1 Touch “Subtitle Language” on the“DVD Settings” screen.

2 Touch the desired language to be readon the “Subtitle Language” screen.

If the desired language to be read cannotbe found on this screen, touch “Other” andenter a language code. For entry of a lan-guage code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTI-TLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” onpage 237.To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,

touch .


DVD SETTINGS

The audio language can be changed.

The subtitle language can be changed.

236


■ MENU LANGUAGE

1 Touch “Menu Language” on the “DVDSettings” screen.

2 Touch the desired language to be readon the “Menu Language” screen.

If the desired language to be read cannotbe found on this screen, touch “Other” andenter a language code. For entry of a lan-guage code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTI-TLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” onpage 237.To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,

touch .


■ ANGLE MARK

1 Touch “Angle Mark” on the “DVD Set-tings” screen.



■ PARENTAL LOCK

1 Touch “Parental Lock” on the “DVDSettings” screen.

2 Enter the 4-digit personal code on the“Key Code” screen.

If the wrong numbers are entered, touch to delete the numbers.

To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,touch .

3 Touch a parental level (1-8) on the “Se-lect Restriction Level” screen.



■ AUTO START PLAYBACK

1 Touch “Auto Start Playback” on the“DVD Settings” screen.



The language on the DVD video menucan be changed.

The multi-angle mark can be turned onor off on the screen while discs that aremulti-angle compatible are beingplayed.

The level of viewer restrictions can bechanged.

Discs that are inserted while the vehicleis in motion will automatically start play-ing. Certain discs may not play.

237


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

■ SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE

1 Touch “Sound Dynamic Range” on the“DVD Settings” screen.

2 Touch “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.


1 Enter the 4-digit language code.

If the wrong numbers are entered, touch to delete the numbers.


2 Touch “OK”.


The difference between the lowest vol-ume and the highest volume can be ad-justed.

ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE

If “Other” on the “Audio Language”screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or“Menu Language” screen is touched,the desired language to be heard orread can be selected by entering a lan-guage code.

238


Code Language

0514 English

1001 Japanese

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali, Bangla

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scottish-Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

Code Language

239


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laotian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian, Lettish

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

Code Language

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Panjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto-Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sango

1908 Serbo-Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

Code Language

240


1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tongan

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

Code Language

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

Code Language

241


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

If “Check DISC” appears on the screen: Itindicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or itwas inserted upside down. Clean the disc orinsert it correctly. If a disc which is not play-able is inserted, “Check DISC” will also ap-pear on the screen. For appropriate discsfor the player, see “AUDIO/VIDEO SYS-TEM OPERATING HINTS” on page 270.If “Region code error” appears on thescreen: It indicates that the DVD regioncode is not set properly.If the malfunction is not rectified: Takeyour vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

Region codes: Some DVD video discs havea region code indicating which countriesthe DVD video disc can be played in on thisDVD player. If the DVD video disc is not la-beled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it onthis DVD player. If you attempt to play an in-appropriate DVD video disc on this player,“Region code error” appears on the screen.Even if the DVD video disc does not have aregion code, there are cases when it cannotbe used.

IF THE PLAYER MALFUNCTIONS

If the player or another unit equippedwith the player malfunctions, the audio/video system will display a message.These are described below.

INFORMATION

●If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DAfiles only, the CD-DA files can be played.If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DAfiles and files other than CD-DA files,only MP3/WMA files can be played.

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISC INFORMATION

DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC/PAL color TV formats. DVD video discsconforming to another format such asSECAM cannot be used.

242


■ MARKS SHOWN ON DVD VIDEODISCS

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc thatholds video. DVD video discs have adopted“MPEG2”, one of the world standards ofdigital compression technologies. The pic-ture data is compressed by 1/40 on aver-age and stored. Variable rate encodedtechnology in which the volume of data as-signed to the picture is changed dependingon the picture format has also been adopt-ed. Audio data is stored using PCM andDolby Digital, which enables higher qualityof sound. Furthermore, multi-angle andmulti-language features will also help usersenjoy the more advanced technology ofDVD video.Viewer restrictions: This feature limits whatcan be viewed in conformity with a level ofrestrictions of the country. The level of re-strictions varies depending on the DVD vid-eo disc. Some DVD video discs cannot beplayed at all, or violent scenes are skippedor replaced with other scenes.

• Level 1: DVD video discs for children canbe played.

• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for childrenand G-rated movie can be played.

• Level 8: All types of the DVD video discscan be played.

NTSC/PAL Indicates NTSC/PALformat of color TV.

Indicates the numberof audio tracks.

Indicates the numberof language subtitles.

Indicates the numberof angles.

Indicates the screen tobe selected.Wide screen: 16:9Standard: 4:3

Indicates a regioncode by which this vid-eo disc can be played.ALL: in all countriesNumber: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

243


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

Multi-angle feature: The same scene canbe enjoyed from different angles.Multi-language feature: The subtitle andaudio language can be selected.Region codes: The region codes are pro-vided on DVD players and DVD discs. If theDVD video disc does not have the same re-gion code as the DVD player, you cannotplay the disc on the DVD player. For regioncodes, see page 241.Audio: This DVD player can play linerPCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for-mat DVDs. Other decoded types cannot beplayed.Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-grams stored in DVD video discs are divid-ed into parts by title and chapter.Title: The largest unit of the video and audioprograms stored on DVD video discs. Usu-ally, one movie, one album, or one audioprogram is assigned as a title.Chapter: A unit smaller than that of title. Atitle comprises of several chapters.

Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. Dolby and the double-Dsymbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

244


8. USB MEMORY OPERATION




Connecting a USB memory enables us-ers to enjoy music from the vehiclespeakers.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the player’s controls orconnect the USB memory while driving.

NOTICE

●Depending on the size and shape of theUSB memory that is connected to thesystem, the armrest may not close fully. Inthis case, do not forcibly close the arm-rest as this may damage the USB mem-ory or the terminal, etc.

●Do not leave your portable player in thecar. In particular, high temperaturesinside the vehicle may damage the porta-ble player.

●Do not push down on or apply unneces-sary pressure to the portable player whileit is connected as this may damage theportable player or its terminal.

●Do not insert foreign objects into the portas this may damage the portable playeror its terminal.

CONNECTING A USB MEMORY

245


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

1 Press the “AUDIO” button if a USBmemory has already been connected.

2 Touch the “USB” tab or press the “AU-DIO” button repeatedly until the “USB”tab is selected.

Tag mode

Folder mode

: Touch to start playing the music.: Touch to pause the music.: Touch to start playing the music again.

PLAYING A USB MEMORY

PLAYING AND PAUSING A USB MEMORY

INFORMATION

●If tag information exists, the file/foldernames will be changed to track/albumnames.

INFORMATION

●When the USB memory is connectedand the audio source is changed to USBmemory mode, the USB memory willstart playing the first file in the first folder.If the same device is removed and rein-serted (and the contents have not beenchanged), the USB memory will resumeplaying from the same point it was lastused.

●Depending on the USB memory that isconnected to the system, certain func-tions may not be available.

246


■ ON THE USB TOP SCREEN

, : Touch to skip to the next or previousfolder/album.

1 Touch the folder/album name screenbutton.

2 Touch the desired tab and select the de-sired folder, artist or album.

Character screen buttons, “ABC”, “DEF”etc., allow a direct jump to list entries thatbegin with the same letter as the characterbutton.Each time the same character screen but-ton is touched, the list starting with the sub-sequent character is displayed.

, : Touch to move the list up or down by5 folder/artist/album groups. If either ofthese screen buttons is touched when thetop/bottom page of the list is displayed, thelast/first page is displayed.“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to quicklyscroll up or down the folder/artist/albumlist.


SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER/ALBUM

SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER, ARTIST OR ALBUM

247


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

■ ON THE USB TOP SCREEN

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedlyuntil the desired file/track number appearson the screen. The player will start playingthe selected file/track from the beginning.“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to skip tothe desired file/track.

■ ON THE FILE/TRACK LISTSCREEN

1 Touch the file/track name screen buttonto display the following file/track listscreen.

2 Touch the desired file/track number.The player will start playing the selectedfile/track from the beginning.

, : Touch to move the list up or down by5 file/track groups. If either of these screenbuttons is touched when the top/bottompage of the list is displayed, the last/firstpage is displayed.“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scrollthrough the file/track list one by one.“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to quicklyscroll up or down the file/track list. To selectthe desired file/track, press the knob.


SELECTING A DESIRED FILE/TRACK

248



1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-wind the file/track.


■ REPEATING A FILE/TRACK

1 Touch “RPT” while the file or track isplaying.

Each time “RPT” is touched, the modechanges as follows:

When “RAND” is off• File/Track Repeat Folder/Album

Repeat Off

When “RAND” is on• File/Track Repeat Off “RPT” appears on the screen. When the

file/track is finished, the player will auto-matically play it again. To cancel this func-tion, touch “RPT” repeatedly until therepeat mode turns off.

■ REPEATING A FOLDER/ALBUM

1 Touch “RPT” repeatedly until“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.

When the folder/album is finished, theplayer will automatically go back to thebeginning of the folder/album and play itagain. To cancel this function, touch “RPT”again.

REPEATING

The file or folder currently being listenedto can be repeated.

249


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

■ PLAYING FILES/TRACKS IN RAN-DOM ORDER

1 Touch “RAND” while the file or track isplaying.

Each time “RAND” is touched, the modechanges as follows:• Random (1 Folder/Album Random)

Folder/Album Random (All Folder/AlbumRandom) Off

Once “RAND” appears on the screen, thesystem selects a file/track randomly fromthe folder/album currently being listened to.To cancel this function, touch “RAND”repeatedly until the random mode turns off.

■ ALL FOLDER/ALBUM RANDOMPLAY

1 Touch “RAND” repeatedly until“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.

Once “FLD.RAND”/“ALB.RAND”appears on the screen, the system selects afile randomly from all of the existing foldersor albums. To cancel this function, touch“RAND” again.

RANDOM ORDER

Files or folders can be automatically andrandomly selected.

250


9. iPod OPERATION

1 Open the cover and connect iPod usingan iPod cable.

Turn on the power of the iPod if it is notturned on.


Connecting an iPod enables users toenjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the player’s controls orconnect the iPod while driving.

NOTICE

●Depending on the size and shape of theiPod that is connected to the system, thearmrest may not close fully. In this case,do not forcibly close the armrest as thismay damage the iPod or the terminal, etc.

●Do not leave your portable player in thecar. In particular, high temperaturesinside the vehicle may damage the porta-ble player.

●Do not push down on or apply unneces-sary pressure to the portable player whileit is connected as this may damage theportable player or its terminal.

●Do not insert foreign objects into the portas this may damage the portable playeror its terminal.

INFORMATION

●When an iPod is connected using a genu-ine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging itsbattery.

CONNECTING iPod

251


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

1 Press the “AUDIO” button if an iPod hasalready been connected.

2 Touch the “iPod” tab or press the “AU-DIO” button repeatedly until the “iPod”tab is selected.


Touch “Video” to display the iPod videocontrol screen.

1 Touch “Browse”.

PLAYING iPod MUSIC

PLAYING AND PAUSING iPod

INFORMATION

●Depending on the iPod, the video soundmay not be able to be heard.

●Depending on the iPod and the songs inthe iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.This function can be changed to “On” or“Off”. See “iPod SETTINGS” on page281. It may take time to display iPodcover art, and the iPod may not be oper-ated while the cover art display is in pro-cess. Only the iPod cover art that is savedin JPEG format can be displayed.

●When an iPod is connected and the audiosource is changed to iPod mode, the iPodwill resume playing from the same point itwas last used.

●Depending on the iPod that is connectedto the system, certain functions may notbe available.

SELECTING A PLAY MODE

252


2 Select the desired play mode.

■ ON THE iPod TOP SCREEN



1 Touch the track name screen button todisplay the following track list screen.


, : Touch to move the list up or down by5 track groups. If either of these screen but-tons is touched when the top/bottom pageof the list is displayed, the last/first page isdisplayed.“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scrollthrough the track list one by one. “TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to quicklyscroll up or down the track list. To select thedesired track, press the knob.



253


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM


1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-wind the player.



“RPT” appears on the screen. When thetrack is finished, the player will automati-cally play it again. To cancel this function,touch “RPT” again.

■ PLAYING TRACKS IN RANDOMORDER

1 Touch “RAND” while the track is play-ing.

Each time “RAND” is touched, the modechanges as follows:• Track Shuffle Album Shuffle OffOnce “RAND” appears on the screen, the

system selects a track randomly from all ofthe existing albums on the iPod. To cancelthis function, touch “RAND” twice.

■ PLAYING ALBUMS IN RANDOMORDER

1 Touch “RAND” repeatedly until“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.

Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen,the system selects an album randomly fromall of the existing albums on the iPod. Tocancel this function, touch “RAND” again.

REPEATING

The track currently being listened to canbe repeated.

RANDOM ORDER


254



2 Touch the “iPod” tab or press the“AUDIO” button repeatedly until the“iPod” tab is selected.

3 Touch “Video” on the iPod top screen.


Touch “Music” to display the iPod topscreen.

1 Touch the album name screen button.

2 Select the desired video group.

PLAYING iPod VIDEO

When the iPod connected to the systemincludes iPod video, the system can onlyoutput the sound by touching “Video”on the “iPod” screen.

DESCRIPTION OF iPod VIDEO CONTROLS


Touch to pause the videoscreen.

Touch to rewind duringplayback.

Touch to resume normalplay during pause.

Touch to fast forward dur-ing playback.

SELECTING A VIDEO GROUP

255


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

■ON THE iPod VIDEO CONTROLSSCREEN

“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedlyuntil the desired file number appears on thescreen. The player will start playing the se-lected file from the beginning.

■ON THE FILE LIST SCREEN

1 Touch the file name screen button todisplay the following file list screen.

2 Touch the desired file number. The play-er will start playing the selected file fromthe beginning.

, : Touch to move the list up or down by5 file groups. If either of these screen but-tons is touched when the top/bottom pageof the list is displayed, the last/first page isdisplayed.“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scrollthrough the file list one by one.


SELECTING A DESIRED VIDEO

256


■FAST FORWARDING OR REWIND-ING

1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-wind the player.


257


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

10. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION

Bluetooth is a trademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.

The Bluetooth® audio system enablesusers to enjoy listening to music that isplayed on a portable player on the vehi-cle speakers via wireless communica-tion.

This audio system supports Bluetooth®,a wireless data system capable of play-ing portable audio music without cables.If your portable player does not supportBluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio sys-tem will not function.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the player’s controls orconnect to the Bluetooth® audio systemwhile driving.

●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®

antennas. People with implanted pace-makers or cardiac defibrillators shouldmaintain a reasonable distance betweenthemselves and the Bluetooth® antennas.The radio waves may affect the operationof such devices.

●Before using Bluetooth® devices, usersof any electrical medical device otherthan implanted pacemakers andimplanted cardiac defibrillators shouldconsult the manufacturer of the devicefor information about its operation underthe influence of radio waves. Radio wavescould have unexpected effects on theoperation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

●Do not leave your portable player in thevehicle. In particular, high temperaturesinside the vehicle may damage the porta-ble player.

258


The quality of the Bluetooth® connectionis indicated as follows:

: An excellent connection toBluetooth®.

: Indicates a bad connection toBluetooth®, resulting in possible deteriora-tion of audio quality.

: No connection to Bluetooth®.

Indicates the amount of battery chargeleft.

INFORMATION

●In the following conditions, the systemmay not function:• The portable player is turned off.• The portable player is not connected.• The portable player has a low battery.

●It may take time to connect the phonewhen Bluetooth® audio is being played.

●Portable players must correspond to thefollowing specifications in order to beconnected to the Bluetooth® audio sys-tem. However, some functions may belimited depending on the type of portableplayer. Also, the different screen is dis-played depending on which portableplayer is connecting.

• Bluetooth® SpecificationVer. 1.1 or higher(Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR orhigher)

• ProfileA2DP (Advanced Audio DistributionProfile) Ver. 1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote ControlProfile) Ver. 1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)

●Refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink to find approved Bluetooth®

devices for this system.

Empty Full

259


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

U.S.A.INFORMATION

●Remaining charge is not displayed whilethe Bluetooth® device is connecting.

●The amount of charge left does notalways correspond correctly with yourportable player.

●This system does not have a chargingfunction.

●An antenna for Bluetooth® connection isbuilt into the instrument panel. The condi-tion of the Bluetooth® connection maynot be good and the system may notfunction when using a Bluetooth® porta-ble player in the following conditions:• The portable player is obstructed by

certain objects (behind a seat or in theglove box or console box).

• The portable player touches or is cov-ered with metal materials.

●Leave the Bluetooth® portable player ina place where the condition ofBluetooth® connection is good.

Portable player information is registeredwhen the portable player is connected tothe Bluetooth® audio system. When sell-ing or disposing of the vehicle, removethe Bluetooth® audio information fromthe system. (See “DELETING ABluetooth® DEVICE” on page 189.)

FCC ID : AJDK041This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

CAUTION

●FCC WARNING: Changes ormodifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

●This equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment and meets theFCC radio frequency (RF) ExposureGuidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels of RFenergy that it deemed to comply withoutmaximum permissive exposureevaluation (MPE). But it is desirable thatit should be installed and operatedkeeping the radiator at least 20cm ormore away from person’s body(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feetand ankles).

●Co-location: This transmitter must not beco-located or operated in conjunctionwith any other antenna or transmitter.

260


Canada

IC : 775E-K041This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSSstandard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference,including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.Le présent appareil est conforme auxCNR d’Industrie Canada applicablesaux appareils radio exempts de licence.L’exploitation est autorisée aux deuxconditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doitpas produire de brouillage, et (2)l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit acceptertout brouillage radioélectrique subi,même si le brouillage est susceptible d’encompromettre le fonctionnement.

CAUTION

●This equipment complies with ICradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment and meetsRSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)Exposure rules. This equipment has verylow levels of RF energy that it deemed tocomply without maximum permissiveexposure evaluation (MPE). But it isdesirable that it should be installed andoperated keeping the radiator at least20cm or more away from person’s body(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feetand ankles).Cet équipement est conforme aux limitesd’exposition aux rayonnements énoncéespour un environnement non contrôlé etrespecte les règles d’exposition auxfréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet uneénergie RF très faible qui est considéréeconforme sans évaluation de l’expositionmaximale autorisée. Cependant, cetéquipement doit être installé et utilisé engardant une distance de 20 cm ou plusentre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (àl’exception des extrémités : mains,poignets, pieds et chevilles).

261


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

The portable player will be automaticallyconnected under the following conditions: • The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in

either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ONmode.

• When “Bluetooth* Power” is switchedfrom off to on.

• When the portable player is discon-nected for some reason.


Under Industry Canada regulations, thisradio transmitter may only operate usingan antenna of a type and maximum (orlesser) gain approved for the transmitterby Industry Canada. To reduce potentialradio interference to other users, theantenna type and its gain should be sochosen that the equivalent isotropicallyradiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more thanthat necessary for successful communi-cation.Conformément à la réglementationd’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteurradio peut fonctionner avec une antenned’un type et d’un gain maximal (ouinférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur parIndustrie Canada. Dans le but de réduireles risques de brouillage radioélectriqueà l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il fautchoisir le type d’antenne et son gain desorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnéeéquivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pasl’intensité nécessaire à l’établissementd’une communication satisfaisante.

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER

To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it isnecessary to register a portable playerwith the system. Once the portable play-er has been registered, it is possible tolisten to the music.Once the portable player has been reg-istered, it is possible to listen to musicthrough the navigation system. (See“REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DE-VICE” on page 188.)

INFORMATION

●For operating the portable player, see theinstruction manual that comes with it.

WHEN “Bluetooth* Power” IS ON

262


1 Touch “Connect”.

2 Touch the desired portable player.

3 When the connection is completed, thisscreen is displayed. It is now possible touse the portable player.

If the Bluetooth® device is disconnectedon purpose, such as it was turned off, thisdoes not happen. Reconnect the portableplayer manually.


WHEN “Bluetooth* Power” IS OFF

Manually connect the portable player inaccordance with the following proce-dure.

INFORMATION

●Touching “Connect Portable Player” onthe “Bluetooth*” screen also connects aBluetooth® audio player. (See page 193.)

●When none of the selectable portableplayers have been registered, a screenconfirming registration is displayed. Reg-istration method is the same as phoneregistration. (See page 146.)

●When the currently connected portableplayer is selected, a screen confirmingthe selected player’s disconnection is dis-played. (See page 195.)

●If connection fails once, a changing con-nection method confirmation screen isdisplayed. If connection fails 2 or moretimes, a message will be displayed. Whenthis message is displayed, try again.

RECONNECTING THE PORTABLE PLAYER

If the portable player is disconnecteddue to poor reception from theBluetooth® network when the “EN-GINE START STOP” switch is in AC-CESSORY or IGNITION ON mode,the system automatically reconnects theportable player.

263


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

1 Press the “AUDIO” button if aBluetooth® audio player has alreadybeen connected.

2 Touch the “BT Audio” tab or press the“AUDIO” button repeatedly until the“BT Audio” tab is selected.


Depending on the portable player that isconnected to the system, the music maystart playing when touching while it ispaused. Conversely, the music may pausewhen touching while it is playing.


, : Touch to skip to the next or previousfolder/album.

■ ON THE PLAYLIST SCREEN

1 Touch the album name screen button todisplay the following playlist screen.

2 Touch the desired screen button. If the folder name screen button is touched,

the track list screen is displayed.

3 Touch the desired track name screenbutton.

PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO

PLAYING AND PAUSING Bluetooth® AUDIO

SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK/FOLDER/ALBUM

264


, : Touch to move the list up or down by5 track/folder groups. If either of thesescreen buttons is touched when the top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/first page is displayed.“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scrollthrough the track list one by one.“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to quicklyscroll up or down the track/folder list. To se-lect the desired track/folder, press theknob.



1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-wind the song.


INFORMATION

●Depending on the portable player that isconnected to the system, certain func-tions may not be available.

●Some titles may not be displayeddepending on the type of portable player.

265


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM




1 Touch the track name screen button todisplay the following track list screen.


, : Touch to move the list up or down by5 track groups. If either of these screen but-tons is touched when the top/bottom pageof the list is displayed, the last/first page isdisplayed.“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scrollthrough the track list one by one.“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to quicklyscroll up or down the track list. To select thedesired track, press the knob.



INFORMATION


266



1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or re-wind the track.


■ REPEATING A TRACK


Each time “RPT” is touched, the modechanges as follows:• Track Repeat Album Repeat Off “RPT” appears on the screen. When the

track is finished, the player will automati-cally play it again. To cancel this function,touch “RPT” repeatedly until the repeatmode turns off.

■ REPEATING AN ALBUM

1 Touch “RPT” repeatedly until“ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.

When the album is finished, the player willautomatically go back to the beginning ofthe album and play it again. To cancel thisfunction, touch “RPT” again.

■ PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THEALBUM IN RANDOM ORDER

1 Touch “RAND” while the track is play-ing.

Each time “RAND” is touched, the modechanges as follows:• Album Random All Track Random

OffOnce “RAND” appears on the screen, the

system selects a track randomly from thealbum currently being listened to. To cancelthis function, touch “RAND” repeatedlyuntil the random mode turns off.

REPEATING

The track or album currently being lis-tened to can be repeated.

RANDOM ORDER


267


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

■ PLAYING TRACKS FROM ALLTHE ALBUMS IN RANDOM OR-DER

1 Touch “RAND” repeatedly until“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.

Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen,the system selects a track randomly from allof the existing albums on the Bluetooth®

device. To cancel this function, touch“RAND” again.

INFORMATION


268


11. AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE CONTROLS (STEERING SWITCHES)

Volume control switch Press the “+” side to increase the volume.

The volume continues to increase while theswitch is being pressed.Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.

The volume continues to decrease whilethe switch is being pressed.

“ ” switch

RadioTo select a preset station/channel: Quicklypress and release the “ ” or “ ” switch. Re-peat this to select the next preset station/channel.To seek a station/channel: Press and holdthe “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is heard.Repeat this to find the next station/channel. Ifeither switch is pressed during seek mode,seeking will be canceled.

DVD playerUse the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or

down to a different track, file or chapter ineither direction.

To select a desired track, file or chapter:Quickly press and release the “ ” or “ ”switch until the desired track, file or chapterto play is selected. To return to the begin-ning of the current track, file or chapter,press the “ ” switch once quickly.To select a desired folder: Press and holdthe “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is heard tochange to the next or the previous folder.Repeat it until the desired folder is selected.

Some parts of the audio/video systemcan be adjusted using the switches onthe steering wheel.

No. Switch

Volume control switch

“ ” switch

“MODE” switch

269


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

Bluetooth® audio playerUse the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or

down to a different track or album in eitherdirection.

To select a desired track: Quickly press andrelease the “ ” or “ ” switch until the de-sired track is selected. To return to the be-ginning of the current track, press the “ ”switch once quickly.To select a desired album: Press and holdthe “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is heard tochange to the next or the previous album.Repeat it until the desired album is selected.

USB memory/iPodUse the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or

down to a different file or track in eitherdirection.

To select a desired file or track: Press the“ ” or “ ” switch until the desired file ortrack is selected. To return to the beginningof the current file or track, press the “ ”switch once quickly.To select a desired folder or album (USBmemory only): Press and hold the “ ” or“ ” switch until a beep is heard to change tothe next or the previous folder or album. Re-peat it until the desired folder or album is se-lected.

“MODE” switch Press the “MODE” switch to select an

audio mode. Each press changes the modesequentially if the desired mode is ready touse.To turn the audio/video system on, press

the “MODE” switch.Press and hold the “MODE” switch to

mute/unmute or pause/resume the currentoperation.

270


12. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS

Fading and drifting stations: Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 25 miles (40km). Once outside this range, you may no-tice fading and drifting, which increase withthe distance from the radio transmitter.They are often accompanied by distortion.Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, mak-ing it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehi-cle’s antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each otherout, causing a momentary flutter or loss ofreception.Static and fluttering: These occur when sig-nals are blocked by buildings, trees or otherlarge objects. Increasing the bass level mayreduce static and fluttering.Station swapping: If the FM signal being lis-tened to is interrupted or weakened, andthere is another strong station nearby onthe FM band, the radio may tune in the sec-ond station until the original signal can bepicked up again.

NOTICE

●To avoid damage to the audio/video sys-tem:• Be careful not to spill beverages over

the audio/video system.• Do not put anything other than an

appropriate disc into the disc slot.

INFORMATION

●The use of a cellular phone inside or nearthe vehicle may cause a noise from thespeakers of the audio/video system whichyou are listening to. However, this doesnot indicate a malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withthe radio — it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.For example, nearby buildings and ter-rain can interfere with FM reception.Power lines or phone wires can interferewith AM signals. And of course, radiosignals have a limited range. The fartherthe vehicle is from a station, the weakerits signal will be. In addition, receptionconditions change constantly as the ve-hicle moves.Here, some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate aproblem with the radio are described.

FM

271


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by theupper atmosphere — especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to sound al-ternately strong and weak.Station interference: When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from a ra-dio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with each oth-er, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.Static: AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as high ten-sion power lines, lightening or electricalmotors. This results in static.

Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,especially metal objects, may adverselyaffect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.Alternation or modifications carried out

without appropriate authorization mayinvalidate the user’s right to operate theequipment.

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”mean that an electronic accessory hasbeen designed to connect specifically toiPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has beencertified by the developer to meet Appleperformance standards.Apple is not responsible for the operation

of this device or its compliance with safetyand regulatory standards. Please note thatthe use of this accessory with iPod oriPhone may affect wireless performance. iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and

iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,registered in the U.S. and other countries.

AM

XM

iPod

272


The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPodclassic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devic-es can be used with this system.Made for

• iPod touch (4th generation)• iPod touch (3rd generation)• iPod touch (2nd generation)• iPod touch (1st generation)• iPod classic• iPod with video• iPod nano (6th generation)• iPod nano (5th generation)• iPod nano (4th generation)• iPod nano (3rd generation)• iPod nano (2nd generation)• iPod nano (1st generation)• iPhone 4• iPhone 3GS• iPhone 3G• iPhone

Depending on differences between modelsor software versions etc., some modelsmight be incompatible with this system.

USB memory that can be used for MP3and WMA playback:• USB communication formats: USB 2.0

HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)• File formats: FAT 16/32• Correspondence class: Mass storage

class

This DVD player is intended for use with4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.Extremely high temperatures can keep the

DVD player from working. On hot days,use the air conditioning system to cool theinside of the vehicle before using the player.Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make

the DVD player skip. If moisture gets into the DVD player, the

discs may not be able to be played. Removethe discs from the player and wait until itdries.

COMPATIBLE MODELS USB MEMORY

CARING FOR YOUR DVD PLAYER AND DISC

CAUTION

●DVD players use an invisible laser beamwhich could cause hazardous radiationexposure if directed outside the unit. Besure to operate the player correctly.

273


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

Use only discs marked as shown above.The following products may not be playableon your player:• SACD• dts CD• Copy-protected CD• DVD audio• Video CD• DVD+R• DVD+RW• DVD-RAM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

DVD PLAYER

Audio CDs

DVD video discs

274


Handle discs carefully, especially wheninserting them. Hold them on the edge anddo not bend them. Avoid getting finger-prints on them, particularly on the shinyside.Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other

disc damage could cause the player to skipor to repeat a section of a track. (To see apin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)Remove discs from the players when not in

use. Store them in their plastic cases awayfrom moisture, heat and direct sunlight.

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-freecloth that has been dampened with water.Wipe in a straight line from the center to theedge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it withanother soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use aconventional record cleaner or anti-staticdevice.

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-pression standards.The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 and

WMA files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs.The unit can play disc recordings compati-

ble with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 andwith the Romeo and Joliet file system.When naming an MP3 or WMA file, add

the appropriate file extension (.mp3 or.wma). The MP3/WMA player plays back files

with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as MP3or WMA files. To prevent noise and play-back errors, use the appropriate file exten-sions.The MP3/WMA player can play only the

first session when using multi-session com-patible CDs.

NOTICE

●Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discssuch as those shown in the illustrations.The use of such discs may damage theplayer, or it may be impossible to eject thedisc.

●This system is not designed for use ofDual Discs. Do not use Dual Discsbecause they may cause damage to theplayer.

●Do not use discs with a protection ring.The use of such discs may damage theplayer, or it may be impossible to eject thedisc.

Correct Wrong

MP3/WMA FILES

275


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

MP3 player: MP3 files are compatible withthe ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 andVer. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot displaydisc title, track title and artist name in otherformats.USB memory: MP3 files are compatible

with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2,Ver. 2.3 and Ver. 2.4 formats. The unit can-not display track title and artist name inother formats.WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is

used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMAtags carry information such as track titleand artist name.The emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.

MP3 files for MP3 player:MPEG 1 LAYER 3 — 32, 44.1, 48 kHzMPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 — 16, 22.05, 24kHzMP3 files for USB memory:MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 32, 44.1,48 kHzMPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 16, 22.05,24 kHzWMA files for WMA player:Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48kHzWMA files for USB memory:Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48kHzThe sound quality of MP3/WMA files gen-

erally improves with higher bit rates. Inorder to achieve a reasonable level ofsound quality, discs recorded with a bit rateof at least 128 kbps are recommended.

MP3 files for MP3 player:MPEG1 LAYER3 — 32 to 320 kbpsMPEG2 LSF LAYER3 — 8 to 160 kbpsMP3 files for USB memory:MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 32 to 320kbpsMPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 8 to 160kbpsWMA files for WMA player:Ver. 7, 8 CBR — 48 to 192 kbpsVer. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps(VBR*)WMA files for USB memory:Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps(VBR*)*: Variable Bit RateThe MP3/WMA player does not play back

MP3/WMA files from discs recordedusing packet write data transfer (UDF for-mat). Discs should be recorded using “pre-mastering” software rather than packet-write software.M3u playlists are not compatible with the

audio player.MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO

formats are not compatible with the audioplayer.The player is compatible with VBR (Vari-

able Bit Rate).When playing back files recorded as VBR

(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time willnot be correctly displayed if the fast for-ward or reverse operations are used. It is not possible to check folders that do not

include MP3/WMA files.MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levels

deep can be played. However, the start ofplayback may be delayed when using discscontaining numerous levels of folders. Forthis reason, we recommend creating discswith no more than 2 levels of folders.

SAMPLING FREQUENCY

PLAYABLE BIT RATES

276


The play order of the compact disc with thestructure shown above is as follows:

MP3/WMA player: It is possible to play upto 192 folders or 255 files on one disc.USB memory: It is possible to play up to

3000 folders, 255 files per folder or9999 files in the device.The order changes depending on the per-

sonal computer and MP3/WMA encodingsoftware you use.

CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not beensubject to the “finalizing process” (a pro-cess that allows discs to be played on aconventional CD player) cannot be played. It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-

RW discs recorded on a music CDrecorder or a personal computer becauseof disc characteristics, scratches or dirt onthe disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on thelens of the unit. It may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer depend-ing on the application settings and the envi-ronment. Record with the correct format.(For details, contact the appropriate appli-cation manufacturers of the applications.)

CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged bydirect exposure to sunlight, high tempera-tures or other storage conditions. The unitmay be unable to play some damageddiscs. If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/

WMA player, playback will begin moreslowly than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be

played using the DDCD (Double DensityCD) system.

This is a general term that describes theprocess of writing data on-demand to CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is writtento floppy or hard discs.

This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. Thisembedded information can include thetrack title, the artist’s name, the album title,the music genre, the year of production,comments and other data. The contentscan be freely edited using software withID3 tag editing functions. Although thetags are restricted to a number of charac-ters, the information can be viewed whenthe track is played back.

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMAtags carry information such as track titleand artist name.

CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS

001.mp3 002.wma

Folder 1003.mp3Folder 2

004.mp3005.wma

Folder 3006.mp3

001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.mp3 TERMS

PACKET WRITE

ID3 TAG

WMA TAG

277


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

This is the international standard for the for-matting of CD-ROM folders and files. Forthe ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels ofregulations.Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8

character file names, with a 3 character fileextension. File names must be composed ofone-byte capital letters and numbers. The“_” symbol may also be included.)Level 2: The file name can have up to 31

characters (including the separation mark“.” and file extension). Each folder mustcontain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

Playlists created using “WINAMP” soft-ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3 is an audio compression standarddetermined by a working group (MPEG) ofthe ISO (International Standard Organiza-tion). MP3 compresses audio data to about1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audiocompression format developed byMicrosoft®. It compresses files into a sizesmaller than that of MP3 files. The decod-ing formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and9.

ISO 9660 FORMAT

m3u

MP3

WMA

Music recognition technology andrelated data are provided byGracenote®. Gracenote is the industrystandard in music recognitiontechnology and related content delivery.For more information visitwww.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 topresent Gracenote. GracenoteSoftware, copyright © 2000 to presentGracenote. One or more patents ownedby Gracenote apply to this product andservice. See the Gracenote website for anon-exhaustive list of applicableGracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB,MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenotelogo and logotype, and the “Powered byGracenote” logo are either registeredtrademarks or trademarks of Gracenotein the United States and/or othercountries.

278


Gracenote® End User LicenseAgreement

This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California (“Gracenote”).The software from Gracenote (the“Gracenote Software”) enables thisapplication to perform disc and/or fileidentification and obtain music-relatedinformation, including name, artist,track, and title information (“GracenoteData”) from online servers orembedded databases (collectively,“Gracenote Servers”) and to performother functions. You may useGracenote Data only by means of theintended End-User functions of thisapplication or device.You agree that you will use GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers for your ownpersonal non-commercial use only.You agree not to assign, copy, transferor transmit the Gracenote Software orany Gracenote Data to any third party.YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPTAS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusivelicense to use the Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and GracenoteServers will terminate if you violatethese restrictions. If your licenseterminates, you agree to cease any andall use of the Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and GracenoteServers. Gracenote reserves all rightsin Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the Gracenote Servers,including all ownership rights. Under nocircumstances will Gracenote becomeliable for any payment to you for anyinformation that you provide. Youagree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforceits rights under this Agreement againstyou directly in its own name.The Gracenote service uses a uniqueidentifier to track queries for statisticalpurposes. The purpose of a randomlyassigned numeric identifier is to allowthe Gracenote service to count querieswithout knowing anything about whoyou are. For more information, see theweb page for the Gracenote PrivacyPolicy for the Gracenote service.

279


5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM

The Gracenote Software and each itemof Gracenote Data are licensed to you“AS IS.” Gracenote makes norepresentations or warranties, expressor implied, regarding the accuracy ofany Gracenote Data from in theGracenote Servers. Gracenotereserves the right to delete data fromthe Gracenote Servers or to changedata categories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient. Nowarranty is made that the GracenoteSoftware or Gracenote Servers areerror-free or that functioning ofGracenote Software or GracenoteServers will be uninterrupted.Gracenote is not obligated to provideyou with new enhanced or additionaldata types or categories thatGracenote may provide in the futureand is free to discontinue its services atany time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALLWARRANTIES EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE,AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.GRACENOTE DOES NOTWARRANT THE RESULTS THATWILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USEOF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWAREOR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. INNO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BELIABLE FOR ANYCONSEQUENTIAL ORINCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FORANY LOST PROFITS OR LOSTREVENUES.copyright © 2000 to presentGracenote

280

2. SETUP

1. AUDIO SETTINGS


2 Touch “Audio”.

3 Touch “HD Radio Settings”.

4 Touch “HD Radio/Analog Setting”.

5 Touch the item to be set.

6 Touch “Save”.

HD Radio™ SYSTEM SETTINGS

HD Radio™ system can be set using theprocedure outlined below.


“All” Touch to receive both ana-log and digital broadcasts.

“HD Only” Touch to receive only digi-tal broadcasts.

“Analog” Touch to receive only ana-log broadcasts.

281

2. SETUP

5

AU

DIO

/VID

EO SY

STEM


2 Touch “Audio”.

3 Touch “iPod Settings”.

4 Touch “Display Cover Art”.


6 After iPod setting has been changed,touch “OK”.

iPod SETTINGS

When the track currently being playedhas cover art data, it can be displayed.

282

2. SETUP

6

283

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. QUICK REFERENCE ........................... 284

2. SOME BASICS ........................................ 286

CLIMATE CONTROL ........................................ 286

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM...................... 286

3. USING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM................................................... 287

SWITCHING TO AUTOMATIC OPERATION MODE ...................................... 287

SETTING THE VEHICLE INTERIOR TEMPERATURE.................................................. 287

ADJUSTING THE SETTINGS MANUALLY......................................................... 288

SWITCHING BETWEEN OUTSIDE AIR AND RECIRCULATED AIR MODES (IS F/IS350/IS350C) ......... 290

SWITCHING BETWEEN OUTSIDE AIR AND RECIRCULATED AIR MODES (IS250/IS250C)...................... 291

DEFOGGING THE WINDSHIELD ............... 291

ADJUSTING THE POSITION OF AND OPENING AND CLOSING THE AIR OUTLETS ............................................................... 292

DEFOGGING THE REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR ..................................... 293

MICRO DUST AND POLLEN FILTER ....... 294

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY ........ 294

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS........................................ 295

1 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

AIR CONDITIONING

284

1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

*1: Driver side temperature display*2: Outside temperature display*3: Passenger side temperature display

Press the “CLIMATE” button to display the air conditioning control screen.

*1 *2 *3

285


6

AIR

CO

ND

ITION

ING


“CLIMATE” button Press to display the air conditioning controlscreen. 286

Fan speed control but-tons Touch to change fan speed. 288

Air flow control buttons Touch to change the air outlets. 288

“DUAL” Touch to set the temperatures independently forthe driver’s and front passenger’s seats. 287

“A/C” Touch to change the air conditioning system be-tween on and off. 295

Air intake control but-ton

Press to change the function between outside airand recirculated air mode. 290

Passenger’s side tem-perature control but-tons

Press to control the passenger’s side tempera-ture. 287

Rear window and out-side rear view mirrordefogger button

Press to defog the rear window and outside rearview mirrors. 293

Windshield air flowbutton Press to defog the windshield. 291

Micro dust and pollenfilter button Press to remove pollen. 294

“ OFF” button Press to turn the fan off. 287, 288

“AUTO” button Press to use the automatic air conditioning sys-tem. 287

Driver’s side tempera-ture control buttons

Press to control the temperature from the driver’sside. When the “DUAL” indicator is on, only thedriver’s side temperature is adjusted.

287

286


2. SOME BASICS

1 Press the “CLIMATE” button to displaythe air conditioning control screen.

CLIMATE CONTROL

Air outlets and fan speed are automati-cally adjusted according to the temper-ature setting.The “ENGINE START STOP” switchmust be in IGNITION ON mode.

A function that enables automatic returnto the previous screen from the air condi-tioning control screen can be selected.See page 46 for details.

NOTICE

●To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the air conditioningsystem on longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

INFORMATION

●During use, various odors from inside andoutside the vehicle may enter into andaccumulate in the air conditioning sys-tem. This may then cause odor to beemitted from the vents.

●To reduce potential odors from occur-ring:• It is recommended that the air condi-

tioning system be set to outside airmode prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may bedelayed for a short period of timeimmediately after the air conditioningsystem is started in automatic operationmode.


The voice command system can be op-erated by pressing the talk switch.

For the operation of the voice commandsystem and the list of commands, seepages 298 and 307.

287


6

AIR

CO

ND

ITION

ING

3. USING THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

1 Press the “AUTO” button.

1 Press the “ ” button on “TEMP” to in-crease the temperature and the “ ”button to decrease the temperature.

1 Touch “DUAL”.

When the passenger’s side temperaturecontrol buttons are pressed, the “DUAL”indicator turns on, and the mode willchange to independent mode.When the “DUAL” indicator is dimmed, the

same temperature is set for both thedriver’s side and front passenger’s side.

SWITCHING TO AUTOMATIC OPERATION MODE

Air outlets and fan speed are automati-cally adjusted according to the temper-ature setting.

Press the “ OFF” button to turn the fanoff.

SETTING THE VEHICLE INTERIOR TEMPERATURE

ADJUSTING THE TEMPERATURE SEPARATELY

“DUAL” is used to set the temperaturesindependently for the driver’s side andfront passenger side.

INFORMATION

●In independent mode, the temperature ofthe rear seats is linked to the front left sideseat set temperature.

288


1 Touch “ ” on to increase the fanspeed and “ ” to decrease the fanspeed. (7 levels)

1 Touch any mode on the screen.

ADJUSTING THE SETTINGS MANUALLY

SETTING THE FAN SPEED

Press the “ OFF” button to turn the fanoff.

SWITCHING THE AIR OUTLETS AND AIR FLOW

The outlets from which air is deliveredcan be selected manually.

No. Function

Floor/windshield

Bi-level

Panel

Floor

289


6

AIR

CO

ND

ITION

ING

Air flows to the upper body (Panel)

: Automatic air flow mode only.

Air flows to the upper body and feet (Bi-level)

Air flows to the feet (Floor)

Air flows to the feet and the windshielddefogger operates (Floor/windshield)

290


1 Press the air intake control button.

When in “AUTO” mode, the air condition-ing system automatically switches betweenoutside air and recirculated air modes.

1 Press the air intake control button untilthe “Adjust Exhaust Gas Sensor”screen appears while the vehicle isstopped.

2 Touch the desired button on the screen.The sensitivity of the button is set to be

higher toward “HI” and lower toward “LO”.

SWITCHING BETWEEN OUTSIDE AIR AND RECIRCULATED AIR MODES (IS F/IS350/IS350C)

The mode switches between outside airmode (introduces air from outside thevehicle), “AUTO” mode and recirculat-ed air mode (recycles air inside the vehi-cle) each time the button is pressed.

No. Function

Recirculated air mode

“AUTO” mode

Outside air mode

ADJUSTING THE SENSITIVITY OF THE AIR INTAKE CONTROL IN AUTOMATIC MODE

291


6

AIR

CO

ND

ITION

ING

1 Press the air intake control button.

1 Press the windshield air flow button.

The air conditioning system control oper-ates automatically.Recirculated air mode will automatically

switch to outside air mode.

SWITCHING BETWEEN OUTSIDE AIR AND RECIRCULATED AIR MODES (IS250/IS250C)

The mode switches between outside airmode (introduces air from outside thevehicle) and recirculated air mode (re-cycles air inside the vehicle) each timethe button is pressed.

No. Function

Recirculated air mode

Outside air mode

DEFOGGING THE WINDSHIELD

CAUTION

●To prevent the windshield from foggingup • Do not use the windshield air flow but-

ton during cool air operation inextremely humid weather. The differ-ence between the temperature of theoutside air and that of the windshieldcan cause the outer surface of the wind-shield to fog up, blocking your vision.

292


Front center outlets

Front side outlets

Rear center outletsADJUSTING THE POSITION OF AND OPENING AND CLOSING THE AIR OUTLETS

No. Function

Direct air flow to the left or right, upor down

Turn the knob to open or close thevent

No. Function



No. Function



293


6

AIR

CO

ND

ITION

ING

1 Press the rear window and outside rearview mirror defogger button.

The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window and the heater panels in theoutside rear view mirrors will quickly clearthe surface.The indicator is on when the defogger is

operating.

DEFOGGING THE REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR

This feature is used to defog the rearwindow and outside rear view mirror.The “ENGINE START STOP” switchmust be in IGNITION ON mode.

CAUTION

●When the outside rear view mirrordefoggers are on, do not touch the out-side surface of the rear view mirror as itcan become very hot and burn you.

NOTICE

●When cleaning the inside of the rear win-dow, be careful not to scratch or damagethe heater wires or connectors.

●To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, turn the switch off when theengine is not running.

INFORMATION

●The defoggers will automatically turn offafter 15 to 60 minutes. The operationtime changes according to the ambienttemperature and vehicle speed.

●If further defrosting or defogging isdesired, simply actuate the switch again.When the surface has cleared, press thebutton once again to turn the defoggeroff. Continuous use may cause the bat-tery to discharge, especially during stop-and-go driving. The defogger is notdesigned to dry rain water or to meltsnow.

●If the outside rear view mirrors areheavily coated with ice, use a spray de-icer before operating the system.

●When the retractable hardtop is open,the rear window defogger is not opera-ble. The indicator will come on if the out-side rear view mirror defoggers are used.(IS350C/IS250C)

294


1 Press the micro dust and pollen filterbutton.

Usually the system will turn off automati-cally after 1 or 3 minutes.To stop the operation, press the micro dust

and pollen filter button again.

The displayed temperature ranges from-40F (-40C) up to 122F (50C).

MICRO DUST AND POLLEN FILTER

Outside air mode switches to recirculat-ed air mode. Pollen is removed from theair flows to the upper part of the body.

INFORMATION

●In order to prevent the window from fog-ging up when the outside air is cold, thefollowing may occur:• Outside air mode does not switch to

recirculated air mode.• The air conditioning system operates

automatically.• The operation cancels after 1 minute.

●In rainy weather, the windows may fog up.Press the windshield air flow button.

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

Outside temperature is displayed on thescreen.

INFORMATION

●In the following situations, the correctoutside temperature may not be dis-played, or the display may take longerthan normal to change.• When stopped, or driving at low speeds

(less than 15.5 mph [25 km/h])• When the outside temperature has

changed suddenly (at the entrance/exitof a garage, tunnel, etc.)

●If the temperature shows “--” or “E”, takeyour vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

295


6

AIR

CO

ND

ITION

ING

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS

INFORMATION

●Using the automatic mode• Fan speed is adjusted automatically in

accordance with the temperature set-ting and ambient conditions. As a result,the following may occur:

• Immediately after the “AUTO” button ispressed, the fan may stop for a whileuntil warm or cool air is ready to flow.

• Cool air may flow to the area aroundthe upper body when the heater is on.

●Using the system in recirculated air mode• The windows will fog up more easily if

the recirculated air mode is used for anextended period.

●Switching between outside air and recir-culated air modes• Recirculated air mode or outside air

mode may be automatically switched toin accordance with the temperaturesetting and the inside temperature.

• When the retractable hardtop isopened, recirculated air mode is auto-matically selected. (IS350C/IS250C)

●Window defogger feature• Recirculated air mode may automati-

cally switch to outside air mode in situa-tions where the windows need to bedefogged.

●When outside temperature approaches32F (0C)• The air conditioning system may not

operate even when “A/C” is selected.

INFORMATION

●Automatic air intake change mode (IS F/IS350/IS350C)• In automatic mode, the system auto-

matically switches between recirculatedair and outside air modes according towhether the system detects harmfulsubstances such as exhaust gas in theair outside.

• When the retractable hardtop isopened, recirculated air mode is auto-matically selected. (IS350C)

●When the indicator light on “A/C” flashes• Touch “A/C” to turn off the air condi-

tioning system and turn it on again.There may be a problem in the air con-ditioning system if the indicator lightcontinues to flash. Turn the air condi-tioning system off and have it inspectedby your Lexus dealer.

●Air conditioning filter• The air conditioning filter may clog after

long use. The filter may need to bereplaced if the air flow of the air condi-tioner and heater experiences extremereductions in operating efficiency, or ifthe windows become to fog up easily.(For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.)

296


7

297

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ......... 298

STEERING SWITCHES FOR THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM .................. 298

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION ....................................................... 298

2. NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION (ENGLISH ONLY) ............................... 304

3. EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS....................................... 306

4. COMMAND LIST................................... 307

1 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION


298

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Talk switchPress the talk switch to start the voice com-

mand system.To cancel voice recognition, press and hold

the talk switch.

1 Press the talk switch.After the “Shortcut Menu” screen has been

displayed, voice guidance will commence.

2 After a beep sounds, say the commandof your choice.

Voice commands are marked with .Some commonly used commands are dis-played on the screen.By saying “Next page” or “Previous page”,

or by touching “Next Pg.”/“Prev. Pg.”, thescreen will display the commands dis-played on the page in the background.Saying “Main menu” or touching “Main

Menu” when the “Shortcut Menu” screenis displayed will display the “Main Menu”screen.Registered POIs, registered names in the

phonebook etc., can be said in the place ofthe “<>” next to the commands. (See page307.)For example: Say “Find nearby dining”,“Call John” etc.

The voice command system enables thenavigation, audio/video, hands-free andair conditioning systems to be operatedusing voice commands.The operating procedures of voicecommands from the “Shortcut Menu”screen are explained here.

INFORMATION

●Commands that are not displayed in the“Shortcut Menu” screen can be operatedfrom the “Main Menu” screen.

STEERING SWITCHES FOR THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

Voice guidance for the voice commandsystem can be skipped by pressing thetalk switch.

299


7

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

3 Say the command displayed on thescreen.

If a desired outcome is not shown, or if noselections are available, perform one of thefollowing to return to the previous screen:• Say “Go back”.• Touch “Go Back”.To cancel voice recognition, touch

“Cancel”, or press and hold the talk switch.

Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance tooffer examples of commands and opera-tion methods.

INFORMATION

●If the navigation system does not respondor the confirmation screen does not dis-appear, press the talk switch and tryagain.

●If a voice command cannot be recog-nized within 6 seconds, voice guidancewill say “Pardon?” (“Command not rec-ognized.” will be displayed on the screen)and voice command reception willrestart.

●If a voice command cannot be recog-nized 2 consecutive times, the voicecommand guidance system will say“Paused. To restart voice recognition,push the talk switch. To cancel voice rec-ognition, push and hold the talk switch.”Then voice recognition will be sus-pended.

●The voice recognition prompt can be setto on or off when “Voice Prompts” istouched. This setting can also bechanged on the “Voice Settings” screen.(See page 56.)

●When “Voice Prompts” is touched, voicerecognition will be temporarily sus-pended. Press the talk switch again.

●Voice guidance can be canceled by set-ting voice prompts to off. Use this settingwhen it is desirable to say a commandimmediately after pressing the talk switchand hearing a beep.

300


IS F/IS350/IS250

IS350C/IS250C 1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Go home”.A confirmation screen will be displayed

showing the recognition results.

3 Say “Yes” or touch “Yes”.The system starts searching for a route to

your home.

When the voice command is recognized,the map of the area around the homeaddress will be displayed and route guid-ance to the home address will begin.

MICROPHONE

It is unnecessary to speak directly intothe microphone when giving a com-mand.

INFORMATION

●Wait for the confirmation beep beforespeaking a command.

●Voice commands may not be recognizedif:• Spoken too quickly.• Spoken at a low or high volume.• The roof or windows are open.• Passengers are talking while voice com-

mands are spoken.• The air conditioning speed is set high.• The air conditioning vents are turned

towards the microphone.

●In the following conditions, the systemmay not recognize the command prop-erly and using voice commands may notbe possible:• The command is incorrect or unclear.

Note that certain words, accents orspeech patterns may be difficult for thesystem to recognize.

• There is excessive background noise,such as wind noise.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: SEARCHING FOR A ROUTE TO YOUR HOME

If a home address is not registered, voiceguidance will say “Your home is not set.Please try again after setting a homelocation.” and you will be prompted toenter a home address. (See page 103.)

INFORMATION

301


7

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Enter an address”. If the destination’s state/province has not

been set or is not contained in the voicecommand recognition list, the screen toinput a state/province will be displayed.

Some areas cannot be recognized by thevoice recognition system.

3 Say “<city name>”.Say the desired city name that belongs to

the set state in the place of the “<>”.Say “Change State” to change the set voice

recognition state.

4 Say “<street name>”.Say the desired full street name, or main

body of the street name that belongs to theset state in the place of the “<>”.The voice command recognition is

designed to recognize the main body of theofficial street name.

For example, if the official street name is“East Main Street”, the voice command rec-ognition will recognize “Main”.

5 Say “<house number>”.Say the desired number, cardinal/intercar-

dinal direction etc. in the place of the “<>”.For example: Say “West 555”. Inputting the house number can be

skipped.

6 Say “Start guidance” or “Show map”. Al-ternatively, touch “Start Guidance” or“Show Map”.

After this, follow the voice guidance andsearch for a destination route by voicecommand operation.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: PERFORMING A DESTINATION SEARCH BY ADDRESS (ENGLISH ONLY)

For information regarding the state/province setting to perform a destinationsearch by address, see “SELECTINGTHE SEARCH AREA” on page 62.

302


1 Press the talk switch. “Play Artist <name>” and “Play Album

<name>” are displayed in the “ShortcutMenu” screen.

2 Say “Play artist <name>” or “Play album<name>”.

Say the desired artist name or album namein the place of the “<>”.A confirmation screen will be displayed

showing the recognition results. If multiplematching items are found, a selectionscreen will be displayed.

3 Say “Yes” or touch “Yes”.

The system starts playing music.

INFORMATION

●Even if the state set using voice recogni-tion is different from the set state in the“Address” screen (which was set when adestination was set manually), the setstate in the “Address” screen will notchange. (For more information on the“Address” screen, see “SELECTING THESEARCH AREA” on page 62.)

●The house number voice recognitionconditions are outlined below:• Numerals: 10 digits or less• Numerals and cardinal/intercardinal

direction or a hyphen and numerals: Atotal of 9 digits or less (Do not say“and”.)

• Cardinal/Intercardinal direction or ahyphen and numerals: A total of 9 dig-its or less (Do not say “and”.)

• Numerals are recognized as singledigits only.

• The cardinal/intercardinal directionand hyphens are only recognizedonce.

• The following cardinal/intercardinaldirections can be recognized: North,East, West, South, North East, NorthWest, South East and South West.

●When inputting the house number isskipped and the recognized candidate listhas multiple entries and so forth, the fullstreet name may need to be recognized.If this occurs, say the full street name. For example, say “East Main Street” and“East Main Street” will be recognized.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: SEARCH FOR A TRACK USING ARTIST NAME OR ALBUM NAME

When “Play Artist <name>” is used toplay music, the first track is selected ran-domly. For operations beyond playingmusic, refer to the “AUDIO/VIDEOSYSTEM” section of this manual.

303


7

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

Music recognition technology andrelated data are provided byGracenote®. Gracenote is the industrystandard in music recognitiontechnology and related content delivery.For more information visitwww.gracenote.com.

INFORMATION

●A USB memory or iPod must be con-nected to enable track searching andplayback. (See “USB MEMORY OPER-ATION” on page 244 and “iPod OPER-ATION” on page 250.)

●When a USB memory or iPod is con-nected, recognition data is created sotracks can be searched using voice com-mands.

●Recognition data is updated under thefollowing conditions:• When the USB memory or iPod data

has changed.• When the voice recognition language is

changed. (See page 49.)●While the recognition data is being cre-

ated or being updated, a track searchcannot be performed using a voice com-mand.

●While “Play Music” is displayed in the“Shortcut menu” screen, say “Play music”to display the music screen from whichsearching for a track using a voice com-mand can be performed.

●When “Play Music” is dimmed in the“Shortcut Menu” screen, it is not possibleto search for a track using a voice com-mand. In this situation, reduce the amountof music data in the USB memory or iPodand update the recognition data toenable searching by voice command.

304


2. NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION (ENGLISH ONLY)

*: Say the desired artist name or albumname in the place of the “<>”.

Due to natural language speech recog-nition technology, this system enablesrecognition of a command when spokennaturally. However, the system cannotrecognize every variation of each com-mand. In some situations, it is possible toomit the command for the procedureand directly state the desired operation.Not all voice commands are displayed inthe short cut menu.

INFORMATION

●The “Set a Destination”, “Use the Phone”,“Play Music” and “Get Information” com-mands displayed on the “Shortcut Menu”screen can be operated using natural lan-guage speech recognition technology.

●If the command cannot be recognizedcompletely, the command input screenwill be displayed. (Search results will beshown based on the part of the commandthat was recognized.)

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR EACH FUNCTION

Command Expression examples

“Go Home” Let’s go home.Take me home.

“Enter an Address”

I wanna enter an ad-dress, please. Put in an address.

“Find Nearby <POI category>”

Find nearby <Restau-rants> for me. I need to see the nearby<Restaurants>.

“Call <name><type>”

Get me <RobertBrown>.I need to call <RobertBrown> at <Work> rightaway.

“Dial <number>”Please dial the number<3334445555>.Ring <3334445555>.

“Play Artist <name>”

Play the artist<XXXXX>. I’d like to hear the band<XXXXX>.*

“Play Album <name>”

Play album <XXXXX>. Music from album<XXXXX>.*

305


7

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

Command Expression examples

“Traffic” How’s the traffic? Check the traffic.

“Weather”What’s the weatherlike? Let’s get a forecast.

“Sports Scores”Team scores.How are my favoriteteams doing?

“Stock Quotes”Stock quotes.How are my stocks do-ing?

“Fuel Prices”Let’s check fuel prices.Find the cheapest gasprices.

INFORMATION

●Commands that are not displayed in the“Shortcut Menu” screen can be accessedfrom the main menu.

●For example, to make an “InternationalCall”, say “Main menu” while the “Short-cut Menu” screen is being displayed.Then say “Use the phone” followed bysaying the desired number, e.g.“123456789”.

306


3. EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Audio on”.

Touching “On” next to “ExpandedVoice Commands” on the “Voice Set-tings” screen enables voice commandoperation of the audio/video and airconditioning system. (See page 56.) Formore information on operations that canbe controlled using expanded voicecommands, refer to “COMMANDLIST”. (See page 307.)

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: TURN THE AUDIO SYSTEM ON

INFORMATION

●Commands relating to operation of theaudio/video and air conditioning systemscan only be performed when the audioand air conditioning systems are turnedon.

●Expanded voice commands can be rec-ognized when the “Shortcut Menu”screen is displayed.

307


7

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

4. COMMAND LIST

All commands are listed in the table. For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be dis-

played in the “Shortcut Menu” screen. Also, according to conditions, other commandsmay not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen.

The functions available may vary according to the navigation system installed.

“Set a Destination”

*1: For example; Gas stations, Restaurants, etc.*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Set a destination” while the “Shortcut

Menu” screen is being displayed.

Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.

Voice recognition language can be changed. (See “SELECTING A LANGUAGE”on page 49.)

Command Action Shortcut Menu

“Find Nearby <POI category>” Displays a list of <POI category*1> near the cur-rent position. O

“Enter an Address” Enables setting a destination by saying the ad-dress. O

“Go Home” Displays the route to home. O

“Call Destination Assist” Connects Lexus Enform with Safety Connectresponse center. —

“Destination by Phone Number”*2

Enables setting a destination by saying thephone number. —

308


“Use the Phone” (See “BY VOICE RECOGNITION” on page 155.)

*1: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Use the phone” while the “ShortcutMenu” screen is being displayed.

“Play Music”

*1: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Play music” while the “Shortcut menu”

screen is being displayed.


“Call <name> <type>”

Calls made by saying a name from the phone-book.For example: Say “Call John Smith”, “Call JohnSmith, mobile” etc.

O

“Dial <number>”Calls made by saying the phone number.For example: Say “Dial 911”, “Dial5556667777” etc.

O

“International Call”*1 Calls international numbers by saying thephone number. —


“Play Artist <name>” Plays tracks by the selected artist.For example: Say “Play artist <XXXXX>”*1 O

“Play Album <name>” Plays tracks from the selected album.For example: Say “Play album <XXXXX>”*1 O

“Play Song <name>”*2Plays the selected track.For example: Say “Play song Summertime”,“Play song Concerto in A Major” etc.

—

“Play Playlist <name>”*2Plays tracks from the selected playlist.For example: Say “Play playlist My FavoriteSongs”, “Play Playlist Classic Hits” etc.

—

309


7

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

“Get Information”

Select audio modeWhen Expanded Voice Commands are turned “On”. (See page 306.)



“Traffic” Displays the traffic incident list. O

“Weather” Displays weather information. O

“Sports Scores” Displays the sports list. O

“Stock Quotes” Displays the stocks list. O

“Fuel Prices” Displays the fuel prices list. O

“Lexus Insider” Displays the Lexus insider list. —


“Radio” Sets the audio mode to radio. O

“AM” Selects the AM band. O

“FM” Selects the FM band. O

“Satellite radio” Selects the satellite radio mode. O

“Disc” Selects the disc audio mode. O

“Auxiliary” Selects the auxiliary audio mode. O

“Bluetooth* audio” Selects the Bluetooth® audio mode. O

“iPod” Selects the iPod audio mode. O

“USB audio” Selects the USB audio mode. O

“Audio on” Turns the audio system on. O

“Audio off” Turns the audio system off. O

310


Climate commandWhen Expanded Voice Commands are turned “On”. (See page 306.)


“Automatic climate control” Turns air conditioning system on and off. O

“Warmer” Turns temperature up. O

“Cooler” Turns temperature down. O

INFORMATION

●Commands that have a “O” in the Shortcut Menu column can be recognized from the“Shortcut Menu” screen.

●Commands that have a “” in the Shortcut Menu column can only be recognized from thescreen that they are displayed in.

8

311

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA............................. 312

MAP INFORMATION .......................................... 312

CERTIFICATION..................................................... 313

1. XM SERVICES .......................................... 314

1. XM Sports ................................................... 317

RECEIVE SPORTS INFORMATION ............ 317

XM Sports SETTINGS —ADD OR DELETE TEAMS ................................................... 318

2. XM Stocks .................................................. 320

RECEIVE STOCK DATA................................... 320

XM Stocks SETTINGS —ADD OR DELETE STOCKS ................................................ 321

3. XM Fuel Prices ......................................... 323

SHOW XM Fuel Prices INFORMATION................................................. 323

VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE INFORMATION................................................. 323

XM Fuel Prices SETTINGS ................................. 324

4. XM NavWeather™ ................................. 326

SHOW XM NavWeather™ INFORMATION................................................. 326

WEATHER INFORMATION........................... 328

WEATHER WARNINGS................................... 329

XM NavWeather™ INDICATOR .................. 329

5. XM NavTraffic®....................................... 330

SHOW TRAFFIC EVENT .................................. 330

SHOW XM NavTraffic® INFORMATION................................................... 331

1. XM SETTINGS ......................................... 333

1 INFORMATION DISPLAY

2 XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW

3 XM FUNCTION OPERATION 4 SETUP

INFORMATION

312

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

1. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA

1 Press the “INFO” button.

2 Touch “Map Data”.

The “Map Information” screen will be dis-played.


2 Touch “Map Data” on the “Information”screen.

3 Touch “Legal Info.”.

The “Legal Information” screen will be dis-played.

MAP INFORMATION

Coverage areas and legal informationcan be displayed and map data can beupdated.

INFORMATION

●Map data updates are available for a fee.Contact your Lexus dealer for furtherinformation.

●The “Map Information” screen displays

“Map Version” and “Map UpdateID”. This data is needed to perform a mapdata update.

LEGAL INFORMATION

Legal information related to the mapdata can be displayed.

8

INFO

RM

ATIO

N

313

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY


2 Touch “Map Data” on the “Information”screen.

3 Touch “Map Coverage”.

The “Map Data Coverage” screen will bedisplayed.

For vehicles sold in Canada

MAP COVERAGE

Map data coverage areas can be dis-played.

CERTIFICATION

This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSSstandard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference,including interference that may causeundesired operation of this device.Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicablesaux appareils radio exempts de licence.L’exploitation est autorisée aux deuxconditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doitpas produire de brouillage, et (2)l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit acceptertout brouillage radioélectrique subi,même si le brouillage est susceptible d’encompromettre le fonctionnement.This device complies with RSS-310 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject tothe condition that this device does notcause harmful interference.Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310

d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation estautorisée sous réserve que l’appareil necause pas de brouillage préjudiciable.

314

2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW

1. XM SERVICES

With an active XM subscription, the follow-ing features are available:

• XM Sports*1 (See page 317.)• XM Stocks*1 (See page 320.)• XM Fuel Prices*2 (See page 323.)• XM NavWeather™*2 (See page 326.)• XM NavTraffic®*2 (See page 330.)

*1: Available at no extra charge with an ac-tive XM Satellite Radio subscription.

*2: Available via separate XM subscrip-tion(s).

XM NavTraffic®, XM NavWeather™ andXM TravelLink require separate XM sub-scription(s). XM Sports*, XM Stocks* andXM Fuel Prices are available with an XMTravelLink subscription. After a 90-daytrial, you must contact XM and set up theappropriate XM subscription(s) to con-tinue receiving these services.

*: XM Sports and XM Stocks are includedwith an XM Satellite Radio subscription.

The XM NavTraffic® service is available inthe contiguous 48 U.S. states and Canada.The XM NavWeather™, XM Sports, XM

Stocks and XM Fuel Prices services areavailable in the contiguous 48 U.S. states.

To receive XM NavTraffic®, XMNavWeather™, XM Sports, XM Stocksand XM Fuel Prices services, the XM ser-vice must be activated. To activate the ser-vice, call the XM Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677 (Canada).Customers should have their radio ID

ready. The radio ID can be found by select-ing “Ch 000” on the radio. For details, see“DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID” on page217.

■ RADIO AND ENTERTAINMENTXM offers more than 170 satellite radiochannels of commercial-free music andpremier sports, news, talk, andentertainment. XM is broadcast viasatellites to millions of listeners across thecontinental United States. XM subscriberslisten to XM on satellite radio receivers forthe car, home, and portable use. Moreinformation about XM is available online atwww.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) orwww.xmradio.ca (Canada).

■ INFOTAINMENT AND DATA SER-VICES

XM offers a variety of advanced infotain-ment and data services.

XM services are subscription-basedXM Satellite Radio services to provideconvenient features to subscribers.

SUBSCRIPTION(S)

AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE(S)

ACTIVATION OF SERVICE(S)

INFORMATION

●For further details about the service, con-tact your Lexus dealer.

●XM Satellite Radio is responsible for allfees and services, which are subject tochange.

XM RADIO SERVICES —DESCRIPTIONS

315


8

INFO

RM

ATIO

N

For XM Services requiring a subscription(such as XM Radio, and some Infotainment& data services), the following paragraphshall be included.Required XM Radio and some Infotainment& data services monthly subscriptions soldseparately after trial period. Subscriptionfee is consumer only. All fees and program-ming subject to change. Subscriptions aresubject to the Customer Agreement avail-able at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) orwww.xmradio.ca (Canada). XM serviceonly available in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces. ©2011Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all re-lated marks and logos are trademarks ofSirius XM Radio Inc. All other marks, chan-nel names and logos are the property oftheir respective owners.For more information, program schedules,and to subscribe or extend subscription af-ter complimentary trial period; more infor-mation is available at:

U.S.A. CustomersVisit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987

Canadian CustomersVisit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677

Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes,one time activation fee, and other fees mayapply. Subscription fee is consumer only. Allfees and programming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to Customer Agree-ment available at www.siriusxm.com(U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada). XMservice only available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and Canada*.*: Canada — some deterioration of service

may occur in extreme northern latitudes.This is beyond the control of XM SatelliteRadio.

Explicit Language Notice — Channels withfrequent explicit language are indicatedwith an “XL” preceding the channel name.Channel blocking is available for XM Satel-lite Radio receivers by notifying XM at;

U.S.A. CustomersVisit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987

Canadian CustomersVisit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-438-9677

XM RADIO SERVICES —SUBSCRIPTION INSTRUCTIONS

XM RADIO SERVICES —LEGAL DISCLAIMERS AND WARNINGS

316


It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disas-semble, reverse engineer, hack, manipu-late, or otherwise make available anytechnology or software incorporated in re-ceivers compatible with the XM SatelliteRadio System or that support the XM web-site, the Online Service or any of its content.Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compres-sion software included in this product is pro-tected by intellectual property rightsincluding patent rights, copyrights, andtrade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.Note: this applies to XM receivers only andnot XM Ready devices.

317

8

INFO

RM

ATIO

N3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION

1. XM Sports


2 Touch “XM Sports”.

The “XM Sports” screen is displayed.The following operations can be per-

formed:• Sports information can be received. (See

page 317.)• XM Sports settings can be set. (See page

318.)


2 Touch “XM Sports” on the “Informa-tion” screen.

3 Touch the desired team to receive infor-mation.

Teams for which there is no current dataavailable will be dimmed and you will not beable to select them.

4 Touch the individual information item tohear it, or touch “Read All” to hear allavailable information for that team.

The selected information will be read out inits entirety.

XM Sports is a service included with anXM Satellite Radio subscription. Thisservice is also available with an XMTravelLink subscription. With this ser-vice, you can receive updates via thenavigation system on your personallyselected sports teams.

RECEIVE SPORTS INFORMATION

The desired teams must be added in or-der to receive information. (See page318.)

318

3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION


2 Touch “XM Sports” on the “Informa-tion” screen.



1 Touch “Add Sports Team”.

Up to 5 teams can be added and saved inthe system for which information will bereceived. The desired teams can bechanged at any time. Teams must be addedone at a time.

2 Touch the desired sporting league ofthe team.

3 Touch the name of the desired team tobe added from the list that appears.

4 Touch “Yes” to confirm or “No” to can-cel.

XM Sports SETTINGS —ADD OR DELETE TEAMS

To input your personalized XM Sportsteam.

Personalized XM Sports teams can alsobe input from the “Setup” screen. (See“XM SETTINGS” on page 333.)

ADD SPORTS TEAM

319


8

INFO

RM

ATIO

N

1 Touch “Delete Sports Teams”.

2 Touch the individual sports team to bedeleted or touch “Select All” to deleteall the teams, and touch “Delete”.


DELETE SPORTS TEAMS

320


2. XM Stocks


2 Touch “XM Stocks”.

The “XM Stocks” screen is displayed.The following operations can be per-

formed:• Stock data can be received. (See page

320.)• XM Stocks setting can be set. (See page

321.)


2 Touch “XM Stocks” on the “Informa-tion” screen.

3 Touch an individual stock to hear its re-lated data, or touch “Read All” to hearthe data for all the stocks saved in thesystem.

The selected data will be read out in itsentirety.Stock data may be delayed by approxi-

mately 20 minutes.

XM Stocks is a service included with anXM Satellite Radio subscription. Thisservice is also available with an XMTravelLink subscription. With this ser-vice, you can receive updates via thenavigation system on your personallyselected stocks.

RECEIVE STOCK DATA

You must first add your desired stocksprior to receiving data. (See page 321.)

321


8

INFO

RM

ATIO

N


2 Touch “XM Stocks” on the “Informa-tion” screen.



1 Touch “Add Stock”.

2 Input the desired stock symbol.

3 When finished, touch “OK”.Up to 10 individual stock symbols can be

added and saved in the system for whichinformation will be received. Stocks mustbe input one at a time. To enter a stock, thesymbol of the desired stock must be known.

XM Stocks SETTINGS —ADD OR DELETE STOCKS

To input your personalized XM Stockssettings.

Personalized XM Stocks settings canalso be input from the “Setup” screen.(See “XM SETTINGS” on page 333.)

ADD STOCK

322


1 Touch “Delete Stocks”.

2 Touch the individual stock to be deletedor touch “Select All” to delete all thestocks, and touch “Delete”.


DELETE STOCKS

323


8

INFO

RM

ATIO

N

3. XM Fuel Prices


2 Touch “XM Fuel Prices”.

The “Fuel Price” screen is displayed.

Gas station name

Sort


2 Touch “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Infor-mation” screen.

3 Touch the desired gas station from thelist.

The location of the selected gas station willbe displayed on the map screen.

XM Fuel Prices is a service includedwith an XM TravelLink subscription. Itenables the navigation system to displaycurrent fuel prices and gas station loca-tions, which can be set as a destination ifdesired.

SHOW XM Fuel Prices INFORMATION

XM Fuel Prices SCREEN

VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE INFORMATION

324


4 Touch “Info”.

When the map scale is at the maximumrange of 0.5 miles (800 m), is notshown. When the map scale is at the mini-mum range of 150 ft. (50 m), is notshown.


2 Touch “Other”.

3 Touch “XM Fuel Prices”.

“Mark”: Touch to mark the selected gasstation on the map screen.“Go to ”: Touch to set the selected gasstation as a destination with route direc-tions.“Add to Route”: Touch to add the select-ed gas station as a destination.“Detail”: Touch to read the selected gasstation’s information.

If is touched, the registeredphone number can be called.

INFORMATION

●The information displayed is received viasatellite radio. Depending on the time theinformation is received, the displayedinformation may not be up to date.

XM Fuel Prices SETTINGS

The desired fuel type, preferred brand,and show prices reported can be regis-tered.

REGISTER FUEL TYPE

325


8

INFO

RM

ATIO

N

4 Touch “Fuel Type”.

5 Touch the desired fuel type. “Premium”, “Midgrade”, “Regular” or

“Diesel” can be selected.

6 Touch “Save”.


2 Touch “XM Fuel Prices” on the “OtherSettings” screen.

3 Touch “Preferred Brand”.

4 Touch the preferred brand.

5 Touch “Save”.


2 Touch “Other” on the “Setup” screen.

3 Touch “XM Fuel Prices” on the “OtherSettings” screen.

4 Touch “Show Prices Reported”.

5 Touch the desired period.“Last 24 Hours”, “Last 2 Days” or “Show

All” can be selected. If “Show All” is selected, information about

gas stations which fuel prices are not pro-vided is also displayed on the list.

6 Touch “Save”.

REGISTER PREFERRED BRAND

REGISTER SHOW PRICES REPORTED

326


4. XM NavWeather™

The following operations can be per-formed:• Show XM NavWeather™ information:

Weather forecast information is displayedon the map screen. (See page 326.)

• Weather information: Weather informa-tion for the selected city is displayed. (Seepage 328.)

• Weather warnings: Weather warningsissued within a radius of approximately 15miles (25 km) or 7.8 miles (12.5 km)around the vehicle are displayed on thewarning screen. (See page 329.)


2 Touch “XM NavWeather”.

The XM NavWeather™ screen is dis-played.

“Info.”When the city icon is touched, “Info.” is dis-

played on the map screen. Touching thisscreen button displays the “Forecast”screen. (See page 328.)

City icon When this screen button is touched, city

names and “Info.” are displayed on theupper part of the screen.

“Forecast”When this screen button is touched, the

city selection screen is displayed.

• Touch a city to display weather informa-tion. Weather information of the selectedcity will be displayed. (See page 328.)

“Current Location”When “Current Location” is touched, the

current position is displayed.

Zoom in/out screen buttonThe scale of the map can be changed.

Three zoom levels can be selected; 16 miles(26 km), 30 miles (48 km) and 60 miles(97 km).

The subscription-based XMNavWeather™ service allows the navi-gation system to display weather infor-mation on the map screen.

SHOW XM NavWeather™ INFORMATION

XM NavWeather™ SCREEN

327


8

INFO

RM

ATIO

N

Weather icons and grids Inclement weather information is displayed

on the map using weather icons and grids.Touching an icon shows the related infor-mation at the top of the screen.

Icon Weather

Tornado

Hurricane

Storm

Flood

Winter

Wind

Extremes

Other

Hail storm

Severe thunderstorm

Heavy fog

Heavy freezing rain/ice

Heavy snow

Heavy rain

328


When the specified day’s weather screenbutton is touched, weather information fora specified day is displayed.

WEATHER INFORMATION

No. Function

Received time

City name

Today’s date

Current weather

Current temperature

Today’s weather

Tomorrow’s weather

Day after tomorrow’s weather

Observed time (Time elapsed sincelast update)

Specified day’s weather

No. Function

Daytime weather

Nighttime weather

Maximum temperature

Minimum temperature

Precipitation probability

329


8

INFO

RM

ATIO

N

“Weather Map”: When this screen button istouched, the “XM NavWeather” screen isdisplayed.“OK”: When this screen button is touched,the screen returns to the map of the currentposition.

When an XM NavWeather™ warning isissued within the vicinity, the XMNavWeather™ indicator will appear on themap screen.

WEATHER WARNINGS

Weather warnings issued within a radiusof approximately 15 miles (25 km) or7.8 miles (12.5 km) around the vehicleare displayed on the warning screen.

XM NavWeather™ INDICATOR

330


5. XM NavTraffic®

The following operations can be performed:

Show XM NavTraffic® Information: Trafficinformation is displayed on the map screen.(See page 331.)Auto Avoid Traffic: If any heavy congestion

or moderate traffic has been detected onthe guidance route, it may be possible foryou to select another route offered by thesystem. (See page 120.)Traffic Incident Warning: Traffic congestion

information is provided using voice guid-ance. (See page 58.)Show Free Flowing Traffic: Freely flowing

traffic is shown by the arrow on the map.(See page 121.)


2 Touch “Traffic Incidents”.

A list of current traffic incidents is displayedalong with information on the incident’s dis-tance and position relative to the vehicle.

3 Touch the desired traffic event.

“On Current Route”: Touch to display thetraffic congestion information for the select-ed route, or the road which the current ve-hicle is on. If a route has not been set, “OnCurrent Road” will be displayed.

The subscription-based XM NavTraffic®

service allows the navigation system todisplay traffic information on the mapscreen.

INFORMATION


SHOW TRAFFIC EVENT

331


8

INFO

RM

ATIO

N


Guidance route traffic information is dis-played on the screen. Touch “Detail” to dis-play detailed traffic event information.


2 Touch “Traffic Information”.

The “Traffic Information” indicator is high-lighted.

3 XM NavTraffic® information is dis-played on the map screen.

On the map screen

On the freeway information screen

SHOW XM NavTraffic® INFORMATION

332


XM NavTraffic® iconWhen any traffic information is received,

the XM NavTraffic® icon will appear onthe map screen. Touching the XMNavTraffic® icon on the screen will startvoice guidance for the traffic information.(See page 40.)

When the XM NavTraffic® icon isselected, voice guidance for the trafficinformation will start even if “Off” for “Traf-fic Incident Warning” is selected.

XM NavTraffic® information arrow

When any XM NavTraffic® information isreceived, the XM NavTraffic® informationarrow will appear on the map screen. Thecolor of the arrow changes depending onthe traffic information received.

XM NavTraffic® indicator

When any XM NavTraffic® information isreceived, the XM NavTraffic® indicator willappear on the screen. The color of the indi-cator changes depending on the trafficinformation received.

*: Touching the XM NavTraffic® indicatorwill start voice guidance.

Color Function

Red Heavy congestion

Yellow Moderate traffic

Green Freely flowing traffic

Color Function

White Traffic information has beenreceived.

Yellow

Traffic restriction informa-tion on the guidance routehas been received (screenbutton*).

RedCongestion information onthe guidance route has beenreceived (screen button*).

333

8

INFO

RM

ATIO

N4. SETUP

1. XM SETTINGS



3 Touch the item to be set.


Used for changing settings for XMSports, XM Stocks and XM Fuel Prices.

No. Function Page

Touch to set XM Sports. 317

Touch to set XM Stocks. 320

Touch to set XM Fuel Pric-es. 323

334

4. SETUP

9

335

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW............... 336

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE.................................................... 337

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 339

PREPARATION BEFORE USING APPS ....................................................... 340

3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ................... 342

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 343

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM .................................. 345

1. APPS ............................................................ 346ACTIVATING “APPS”......................................... 346

LINKING “APPS” AND NAVIGATION LOCAL FUNCTION ....................................... 349

INPUTTING KEYWORD OPERATION ......................................................... 351

2. Destination Assist..................................... 353

MAKE A CALL WITH Destination Assist ................................................ 353

3. eDestination............................................... 355

DOWNLOAD eDestinations ........................... 355

RETRIEVE AN eDestination .............................. 356

SHOW eDestination ICONS............................ 357

4. Lexus Insider .............................................. 358

VIEW AND PLAY RECEIVED Lexus Insider MESSAGES.............................. 358

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION.............. 360

Lexus Insider SETTINGS ....................................... 361

1 LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

2 LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT

336

1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

The functions included in Lexus Enform with Safety Connect are classified into the fol-lowing three types.Type A: Function achieved by using a cellular phoneType B: Function achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle

(DCM: Data Communication Module) and the navigation systemType C: Function achieved by using DCM

Each function is available in the following areas:• Apps is available in the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska.• Destination Assist and eDestination are available in the contiguous United States.• Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous 48 states and Canada.• Safety Connect includes four features.

Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Locationare available in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, andEnhanced Roadside Assistance is available in the United States (except Hawaii) and inCanada.

Lexus Enform with Safety Connect is a feature that includes Apps, Destination Assist,eDestination, Lexus Insider, and Safety Connect.

Function Type

Apps Type A

Destination Assist Type B

eDestination Type B

Lexus Insider Type B

Safety Connect Type C

INFORMATION

●The actual service availability is dependent on the network condition.

337


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE

Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, only Apps can beachieved by using a cellular phone.Apps is a service that enables the usable contents of a cellular phone to be displayedon and operated from the navigation screen. Before Apps can be used, a few settingsneed to be performed. (See page 340.)

338


*: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink.

No. Name Function

Contents provider Provides contents to the navigation system via a cellular phone.

Application server Provides applications to the navigation system via a cellularphone.

Cellular phone*

Using the Apps application, communication is relayed betweenthe navigation system, the application server and the contentsprovider.A cellular phone cannot be operated while communicating.

Application player Runs applications on the navigation system. The navigation sys-tem is equipped with an application player.

Applications(“Apps”)

Displays and sounds the usable contents from the contents pro-viders via a cellular phone on the application player.

Navigation system Contents received, via a cellular phone, from the contents pro-vider servers are displayed on the navigation screen.

339


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT

Apps will be available on a trial periodincluded upon purchase of a new vehicle.User registration is required to start usingthe service. (See page 341.)When a trial period has elapsed after pur-

chasing a new vehicle, a fee will be chargedto renew the contract.*Services requiring a separate contract can

also be used.**: For details, refer to http://www.lexus.com/

enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.

Apps is available in the 48 states, D.C. andAlaska.

The following personal data can be deletedand returned to their default settings:• Downloaded contents• Radio stations that were listened to• Input history

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE

INFORMATION

●When using Apps, depending on thedetails of your cellular phone contract,data usage fees may apply. Confirm datausage fees before using this service.

●In this section, the required operations toactivate “Apps”, connect a cellular phoneto the navigation system and registrationsteps for Apps are explained. For detailsregarding Apps operations and each ofthe “Apps”, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

INITIALIZING PERSONAL DATA

The personal data used in “Apps” can bereset. (See “DELETING PERSONALDATA” on page 54.)

INFORMATION

●Once initialized, data will be erased. Payclose attention when initializing the data.

340


Perform the settings in the following order.

In order to use Apps, the following settingsmust first be performed:User registration with the service contract

(See page 340.)Download the Apps application onto your

cellular phone, and login to the application.(See page 341.)Register the cellular phone that the Apps

application was downloaded to with thenavigation system. (See page 341.)

Register a Bluetooth® phone with thehands-free system. (For detailed informa-tion about registration and settings, see“Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page 187.)

1 Perform user registration from the des-ignated web address.

PREPARATION BEFORE USING APPS

SETTINGS REQUIRED TO USE APPS

1 User registration

2 Download the Apps application toyour cellular phone.

3 Register the cellular phone with thenavigation system.

USER REGISTRATION

When purchasing the vehicle, an emailaddress is registered at your Lexus deal-er. If your email address was not regis-tered at your Lexus dealer, your emailaddress can be registered at the Lexusdrivers website. A user registrationguidance email containing a web ad-dress will be sent.

INFORMATION

●If your email address was not registeredat your Lexus dealer when the vehiclewas purchased, an email address can beregistered at http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

341


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT

1 Download the Apps application usingyour cellular phone.

2 Run the Apps application on your cellu-lar phone.

3 Enter a user name and password intothe Apps application. Login to the appli-cation.

REGISTERING THE APPS APPLICATION

INFORMATION

●“Apps” can only be used when the Appsapplication has been downloaded to yourcellular phone and the application is run-ning.

●Apps operational procedures can also beconfirmed by visiting http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

●In order to use “Apps”, it is necessary torun the Apps application, enter your username and password and display the mainmenu on the cellular phone.

●An iPhone cannot be connected viaBluetooth® and USB connection at thesame time. However, it is possible torecharge an iPhone while using Apps byconnecting via USB. The system uses theconnection method that was used last.Therefore, if connected via USB afterBluetooth® connection, it is necessary toreconnect the iPhone via Bluetooth®.

342


3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, Destination Assist,eDestination, and Lexus Insider can be achieved by making DCM cooperate with thenavigation system.These are subscription-based telematics services that use Global Positioning System(GPS) data, embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security as well asconvenience features to subscribers.The services are supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24hours per day, 7 days per week. The services are available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equippedvehicles.

No. Name No. Name

Lexus’ designated response center DCM

TEL, GPS antenna Navigation system

343


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT

After you have signed the Telematics Sub-scription Service Agreement and areenrolled, you can begin receiving services.A variety of subscription terms is availablefor purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer,call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987), or touch “Destination Assist” inyour vehicle for further subscription details.(See page 353.)

Destination Assist and eDestination areavailable in the contiguous United States.Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous

48 states and Canada.

Enrollment in Lexus Enform with SafetyConnect (via your dealership) is requiredto activate all services.

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE(S)

ACTIVATION OF SERVICE(S)

Certification for Lexus Enform withSafety Connect

NOTEThis device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.FCC WARNINGChanges or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

FCC ID: O9EGTM1FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101FCC ID: N7NGTM2

344


INFORMATION

●Exposure to radio frequency signals:The Lexus Enform with Safety Connectsystem installed in your vehicle is a lowpower radio transmitter and receiver. Thesystem receives and also sends out radiofrequency (RF) signals.

●In August 1996, the Federal Communi-cations Commission (FCC) adopted RFexposure guidelines with safety levels formobile wireless phones. Those guidelinesare consistent with the safety standardspreviously set by both U.S. and interna-tional standards bodies.• ANSI (American National Standards

Institute) C95.1 [1992]• NCRP (National Council on Radiation

Protection and Measurement) Report86 [1986]

• ICNIRP (International Commission onNon-Ionizing Radiation Protection)[1996]

●Those standards were based on compre-hensive and periodic evaluations of therelevant scientific literature. Over 120scientists, engineers, and physicians fromuniversities, government health agen-cies, and industry reviewed the availablebody of research to develop the ANSIStandard (C95.1).

●The design of Lexus Enform with SafetyConnect complies with the FCC guide-lines in addition to those standards.

INFORMATION

●Available beginning Fall 2009 on selectLexus models. Contact with the LexusEnform with Safety Connect responsecenter is dependent upon the telematicsdevice being in operative condition, cel-lular connection availability, navigationmap data, and GPS satellite signal recep-tion, which can limit the ability to reachthe response center or receive support.Enrollment and Telematics SubscriptionService Agreement required. A variety ofsubscription terms is available; chargesvary by subscription term selected.

●The Lexus Enform with Safety Connectresponse center will offer support in mul-tiple languages.

●Select Lexus Enform with Safety Con-nect-subscribed vehicles are capable ofcommunicating vehicle information, trig-gering owner reminder notifications.Owners who do not wish to have theirvehicle transmit this information can optout of the service at the time of enroll-ment or by calling 1-800-255-3987 andfollow the prompt for Lexus Enform withSafety Connect.

●For further details about the service, con-tact your Lexus dealer.

●Lexus Enform with Safety Connect ser-vices are not subject to section 255 ofthe Telecommunications Act and thedevice is not TTY compatible.

345


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM

Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, Safety Connectcan be achieved by using DCM.For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.

346

2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION

1. APPS


2 Touch “Apps”.

3 A screen indicating that updates are be-ing checked for will be displayed.

4 Touch “OK”.

To cancel updating, touch “Cancel”.After touching “Cancel”, the “Information”

screen will be displayed.The “Information” screen will also be dis-

played if updating fails.

5 A screen indicating that an update is inprogress will be displayed.

To stop updating, touch “Cancel”.After touching “Cancel”, the “Information”

screen will be displayed.The “Information” screen will also be dis-

played if updating fails.

6 Touch “OK”.

ACTIVATING “APPS”

Each time “Apps” is activated, the sys-tem checks for updates. When there areno updates available, the main menuscreen will be displayed right after ascreen indicating that updates are beingchecked for has been displayed.

ACTIVATING “APPS”

347


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT

7 When updating is complete, the mainmenu screen will be displayed.

The screen shown above is only an exam-ple. The actual screen may be different.For details about the function and service

of each application displayed in the mainmenu, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

348


IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN

When problems occur starting up the application player, a message will appear on thescreen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested cor-rective action.

Message Display conditions Corrective action

“This feature is unavailableduring an emergency call.”

Safety Connect is being im-plemented.

After Safety Connect is fin-ished, perform the operationagain.

“This feature is unavailablewhile transferring contacts.”

Contacts are being trans-ferred manually from thephonebook.

When the transfer of contactsis complete, perform the op-eration.

“There is a problem with theBluetooth* connection.For troubleshooting assis-tance, please visit lexus.comor call 1-800-255-3987.”

The cellular phone cannot beconnected.

Refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ to confirm if thephone is compatible or not.

“This feature is unavailableduring a handsfree call.”

A hands-free call is inprogress.

After the hands-free call is fin-ished, perform the operation.

“To use the services, an activeapplication needs to be run-ning on your phone. For moreinformation, please visitlexus.com.”

The Apps application cannotbe connected to Bluetooth*SPP.

Refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ to confirm if thephone is Bluetooth* SPPcompatible or not, and thenactivate the Apps application.

“Communication error. Please try again.”

Communication was discon-nected.

After a few moments, retry theoperation.


349


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT


2 Touch “Apps”.

3 A screen indicating that updates are be-ing checked for will be displayed.

4 When updating is complete, the mainmenu screen will be displayed.

The screen shown above is only an exam-ple. The actual screen may be different.For details about the function and service

of each application displayed in the mainmenu, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

LINKING “APPS” AND NAVIGATION LOCAL FUNCTION

The navigation system’s setting a desti-nation and making a hands-free call canbe performed via “Apps”.

INFORMATION

●Some parts of “Apps” can be adjustedusing the switches on the steering wheel.

350


1 Touch “Map”.

2 Touch “Go to ”.

3 To start guidance, touch “OK”.

1 Touch “Call”.

2 Touch “Yes”.

To cancel making a phone call, touch“Cancel”.

3 A screen indicating that a call is inprogress will be displayed.

SETTING A DESTINATION USING “APPS”

Locations that were searched using“Apps” can be set as a destination.

For the operation of the route guidancescreen and the function of each screenbutton, see “STARTING ROUTE GUID-ANCE” on page 81.

MAKING A PHONE CALL USING “APPS”

Phone calls can be made to locationswhich were searched using “Apps”.

For phone operation and the function ofeach screen button, see “TALK ON THEBluetooth® PHONE” on page 159.

351


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT

1 Touch the character input space.

2 Touch the screen buttons to input the de-sired characters, and then touch “OK”.

3 Input characters will be reflected on thecharacter input space.

1 Touch the microphone screen button.

INPUTTING KEYWORD OPERATION

A keyword can be input to “Apps” by thesoftware keyboard or voice recognitionfunction.

The keyboard layout can be changed.(See page 50.)

INPUTTING A KEYWORD USING THE SOFTWARE KEYBOARD

For details on operating the keyboard,see “INPUTTING LETTERS ANDNUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERA-TION” on page 30.

INPUTTING A KEYWORD USING THE VOICE RECOGNITION FUNCTION

Voice recognition is a function that usesthe center’s database to enable the useof the voice recognition function.

352


2 When this screen is displayed, say thedesired keyword.

Completion of saying the keyword will bedetected automatically.

3 Search results will be displayed on thescreen.

The screen shown above is only an exam-ple. The actual screen may be different.

353


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT

2. Destination Assist


2 Touch “Destination Assist”.

The “Destination Assist” screen is dis-played.

Destination Assist provides you with liveassistance for finding destinations via theLexus Enform with Safety Connect re-sponse center. You can request either aspecific business, address, or ask forhelp locating your desired destinationby category, such as restaurants, gasstations, shopping centers or otherPoints of Interest (POI).After you tell the agent your choice ofdestination, its coordinates are sentwirelessly to your vehicle’s navigationsystem.

MAKE A CALL WITH Destination Assist

354


3 When an agent comes on the line, tellthe agent the address, business name,or the type of POI or service you wouldlike to locate.

To adjust the call volume, touch “–” or “+”on the “Destination Assist” screen, or usethe volume switch on the steering wheelduring the call.To hang up the phone, touch “Disconnect”

on the “Destination Assist” screen or pressthe switch on the steering wheel.

4 After the agent helps you determineyour location of choice, this screen isdisplayed. Touch the button of the screen for theappropriate action.

“Mark”: Touch to mark the POI on thenavigation map.“Map”: Touch to display the POI on thenavigation map.“Go”: Touch to set the POI as a destina-tion with route directions.“Detail”: Touch to read the POI notes youentered online, if any. If is touched, the registered


355


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT

3. eDestination

Locations can be organized into up to 20personalized folders.


2 Touch “Point of Interest”.

3 Touch “eDestination”.

The “eDestination” screen is displayed.

With the eDestination feature, you cango online, via the Lexus.com owner’sWeb site, to select and organize desti-nations of your choice and then wire-lessly send them to your vehicle’snavigation system. Up to 200 locationscan be stored online and accessed orupdated at any time.

INFORMATION

●You must first go online atwww.lexus.com/drivers/ to view theOwners site where you will need to regis-ter and log in. After this, personalizedfolders that contains the locations to besent to your vehicle can be created. (SeeLexus Enform with Safety ConnectGuide for more information.)

DOWNLOAD eDestinations

After updating eDestination folders on-line, the information to update the data inthe vehicle will be needed to download.

356


4 Touch “Download”.

5 Touch “Yes” to confirm or “No” to can-cel download.

When “Yes” is touched, your most recentonline eDestination data will be loaded tothe navigation system.



3 Touch “eDestination” on the “Point ofInterest” screen.

4 Touch the desired eDestination folder.

5 Touch the desired location.

6 Touch the button of the screen for theappropriate action.

RETRIEVE AN eDestination

357


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT


2 Touch “eDestination Icons”.

The “eDestination Icons” indicator is high-lighted.

“Mark”: Touch to mark the POI on thenavigation map.“Map”: Touch to display the POI on thenavigation map.“Go”: Touch to set the POI as a destina-tion with route directions.“Detail”: Touch to read the POI notes youentered online, if any. If is touched, the registered


SHOW eDestination ICONS

358


4. Lexus Insider


2 Touch “LEXUS Insider”.

The “LEXUS Insider” screen is displayed.

3 Touch the desired article title from theLexus Insider menu to play that broad-cast or touch “Read All” to listen to allstored Lexus Insider broadcasts.

When “Read All” is touched, “Stop” is dis-played. To stop listening to the broadcast,touch “Stop”.To disrupt the audio read of Lexus Insider,

press the “MODE” switch on the steeringwheel, or press the “AUDIO” button on theaudio system.

Lexus Insider is an optional service thatcan send audio messages, or articles, toparticipating owners’ vehicles via thenavigation system. Potential Lexus Insid-er subjects might include, for example,Lexus vehicle technology tips, updateson regional Lexus events, or audio ex-cerpts from Lexus Magazine articles.Up to 20 articles can be stored at a time.You may opt out of receiving Lexus In-sider messages at any time. (See page360.)

VIEW AND PLAY RECEIVED Lexus Insider MESSAGES

359


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT

Icons appear at the left of the Lexus Insiderstory titles and indicate the following:

1 After touching an individual article, se-lect “Next” or “Previous” to listen to an-other article.

The “ ” or “ ” switch on the steering wheelcan be used to move to the previous or nextarticle.To stop listening to the broadcast, touch

“Stop” or press the “PWR·VOL” knob onthe audio system.

1 If it contains a POI, “Enter ” can betouched to download it to the navigationsystem.

2 Touch “Go to ” to set the POI as adestination with route directions.

ABOUT ICONS

Icon Article

Unread article

Previously read article

Unread article withdownloadable Point ofInterest (POI)

Previously read articlewith downloadable Pointof Interest (POI)

LISTEN TO ANOTHER ARTICLE

DOWNLOAD A POI

Some Lexus Insider stories will contain adownloadable POI relevant to the con-tent.

360



2 Touch the individual article title to bedeleted or “Select All” to delete all thearticle titles, and touch “Delete”.


1 When the new message notification ap-pears, any of the following options canbe touched.

DELETE Lexus Insider ARTICLE NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION

When the vehicle is first powered on anda new Lexus Insider article is available, anotification will appear on the navigationscreen.The notice will appear for only approxi-mately 6 seconds unless one of the op-tions listed is selected.

“Listen Now”: Touch to play newly re-ceived Lexus Insider article(s).“Listen Later”: Touch to remove notifica-tion screen without playing articles. Noti-fication will be displayed again when thevehicle is next powered on.

361


9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

WITH

SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT



3 Touch “LEXUS Insider”.


Perform each setting according to the pro-cedures outlined on the following pages.

Lexus Insider SETTINGS

To change Lexus Insider settings, notifi-cation, and opt in or out of article re-ceipt.

362


1 Touch “Receive LEXUS Insider”.

2 Touch “Yes” to receive Lexus Insider ar-ticles or “No” to opt out of receiving ar-ticles.

3 Touch “Save”.

1 Touch “New Message Notification”.


3 Touch “Save”.



RECEIVE/OPT OUT OF Lexus Insider

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION

Automatic notification of new Lexus In-sider articles is available and is the de-fault setting.

RESTORE THE DEFAULT Lexus Insider SETTINGS

10

363

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM................................................... 364

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ............... 364

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS .............................. 364

SCREEN DISPLAY ............................................... 365

2. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ................................... 366

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN................ 366

THE CAMERA ......................................................... 367

3. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW..... 368

IF YOU THINK SOMETHING IS WRONG................................................................ 368

1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ........... 370

TYPES OF SENSORS.......................................... 370

SETTING THE INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST MODE .................................................... 370

DISPLAY ...................................................................... 371

THE DISTANCE DISPLAY AND BUZZER .................................................................. 372

DETECTION RANGE OF THE SENSORS ............................................................... 374

SENSOR DETECTION INFORMATION.................................................. 374

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST-SENSOR FAILURE WARNING............................................................. 376

CERTIFICATION.................................................... 376

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING.................................. 377

SETTING AN ALERT VOLUME..................... 377

SETTING A PARKING SONAR DISPLAY................................................................. 378

SETTING A DISPLAY AND TONE INDICATION....................................................... 378

1 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM 2 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

364

1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM


REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

The rear view monitor system assists thedriver by displaying an image of the viewbehind the vehicle while backing up, forexample while parking.

INFORMATION

●The screen illustrations used in this textare intended as examples, and may differfrom the image that is actually displayedon the screen.

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

When backing up, be sure to visuallycheck all around the vehicle both direct-ly and using the mirrors before proceed-ing. If you do not, you may hit anothervehicle, and could possibly cause an ac-cident.Pay attention to the following precau-tions when using the rear view monitorsystem.

CAUTION

●The rear view monitor system is a supple-mental device intended to assist thedriver when backing up. Never dependon the rear view monitor system entirelywhen backing up. Always make sure yourintended path is clear.Use caution, just as you would whenbacking up any vehicle.

●Never back up while looking only at thescreen.The image shown on the screen may dif-fer from the actual state, and you couldcollide with another vehicle or obstaclesif backing up looking only at the screen,possibly causing an accident. Whenbacking up, be sure to check in front ofand behind the vehicle, both directly andwith mirrors.

●Be sure to back up slowly, depressing thebrake pedal to control vehicle speed.

●When parking, be sure to check that theparking space will accommodate yourvehicle before maneuvering into it.

●In low temperatures, the screen maydarken or the image may become faint.The image could distort when the vehicleis moving, or you may become unable tosee the image on the screen. Be sure tovisually check all around the vehicle bothdirectly and using the mirrors before pro-ceeding.

●The camera uses a special lens. The dis-tances between objects and pedestriansthat appear in the image displayed on thescreen will differ from the actual dis-tances. (See page 367.)

365


10

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

Intuitive parking assistIf an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist is on, a display is shown in thetop right corner of the screen.

When the shift lever is shifted to the “R” position and any mode button (such as the“MAP/VOICE” button) is pressedThe rear view monitor system is canceled, and the screen is switched to the mode of

the button that was pressed.

SCREEN DISPLAY

The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the“R” position while the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

CANCELING REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

The rear view monitor system is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any posi-tion other than the “R” position.

366


2. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS

The image adjustment procedure for therear view monitor system screen is thesame as the procedure for adjusting thenavigation screen. (See page 33.)

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN

The rear view monitor system displaysan image of the view from the bumper ofthe rear area of the vehicle.

Screen

Displayed area

Corners of bumper

INFORMATION

●The area displayed on the screen mayvary according to vehicle orientationconditions.

●Objects which are close to either cornerof the bumper or under the bumper can-not be displayed.

●The camera uses a special lens. The dis-tance of the image that appears on thescreen differs from the actual distance.

●Items which are located higher than thecamera may not be displayed on themonitor.

367


10

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

THE CAMERA

The camera for the rear view monitorsystem is located as shown in the illustra-tion.

USING THE CAMERA

If the camera lens becomes dirty, it can-not transmit a clear image. If water drop-lets, snow or mud adhere to the lens,rinse with water and wipe with a softcloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, washit with a mild cleanser and rinse.

NOTICE

●The rear view monitor system may notoperate properly in the following cases,or if the precautions described below arenot followed.• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the posi-

tion and mounting angle of the cameramay change.

• As the camera has a water proof con-struction, do not detach, disassemble ormodify it. This may cause incorrectoperation.

• Do not strongly rub the camera lens. Ifthe camera lens is scratched, it cannottransmit a clear image.

• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,window cleaner or glass coat to adhereto the camera. If this happens, wipe it offas soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rapidly, suchas when hot water is poured on thevehicle in cold weather, the system maynot operate normally.

• When washing the vehicle, do not applyintensive bursts of water to the cameraor camera area. Doing so may result inthe camera malfunctioning.

●Do not expose the camera to strongimpact as this could cause a malfunction.If this happens, have the vehicleinspected by your Lexus dealer as soonas possible.

368


3. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution,and re-check.If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexusdealer.

IF YOU THINK SOMETHING IS WRONG

Symptom Likely cause Solution

The image is difficult to see The vehicle is in a dark area The temperature around

the lens is either high or low The outside temperature is

low There are water droplets on

the camera It is raining or humid Foreign matter (mud etc.) is

adhering to the camera Sunlight or headlights are

shining directly into thecamera

The vehicle is under fluo-rescent lights, sodium lights,mercury lights etc.

Back up while visually check-ing the vehicle’s surroundings.(Use the monitor again onceconditions have been im-proved.)The procedure for adjustingthe picture quality of the rearview monitor system is thesame as the procedure for ad-justing the navigation screen.(See page 33.)

The image is blurry Dirt or foreign matter (such aswater droplets, snow, mudetc.) is adhering to the cam-era.

Rinse the camera lens withwater and wipe it clean with asoft cloth.Wash with a mild soap if thedirt is stubborn.

369


10

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

A vertical white streak is onthe screen

When a bright spot (such assunlight reflecting off the bodyof another vehicle) is receivedby the camera, a verticalstreak may be left above andbelow the bright spot (smeareffect).

Back up while visually check-ing the vehicle’s surroundings.(Use the monitor again onceconditions have been im-proved.)

The image is out of alignment The camera or surroundingarea has received a strong im-pact.

Have the vehicle inspected byyour Lexus dealer.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Bright spot

370

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST


Front corner sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

1 Press “<” or “>” of the satellite switch un-til the intuitive parking assist-sensormark appears in the multi-informationdisplay.

IS F

IS350/IS250/IS350C/IS250C

2 Press the “ON/OFF” button of the sat-ellite switch to select “ON”.

The intuitive parking assist-sensor indicatorwill be displayed.

The distance to obstacles measured bythe sensors is communicated via the dis-play and a buzzer when parallel parkingor maneuvering into a garage. Alwayscheck the surrounding area when usingthis system.

TYPES OF SENSORS

SETTING THE INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST MODE

371


10

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

■ MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

Front corner sensors operation

Rear corner sensors operation

Rear center sensors operation

■ NAVIGATION DISPLAY

When the vehicle is moving forwardThe graphic is automatically displayed

when an obstacle is detected. The screencan be set so that the graphic is not dis-played. (See page 377.)

When the vehicle is moving backwardA simplified image is displayed on the right

upper corner of the screen when an obsta-cle is detected.

Pressing the “ON/OFF” button turnsthe intuitive parking assist-sensor on andoff.

To turn on: Press the “ON/OFF” button.The buzzer sounds to informthe driver that the system isoperational.

To turn off: Press the “ON/OFF” buttonagain.

The intuitive parking assist-sensor willremain on even after turning the“ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFFand then to IGNITION ON mode withthe intuitive parking assist-sensor on.However, a beep does not sound at thistime.

DISPLAY

When the sensors detect an obstacle,the graphic is shown on the multi-infor-mation display and navigation displayaccording to position and distance tothe obstacle.

372


■ CORNER SENSORS

■ CENTER SENSORS

■ DETECTION LEVEL AND APPROXIMATE DISTANCE TO AN OBSTA-CLE (IS F/IS350/IS250)

THE DISTANCE DISPLAY AND BUZZER

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance tothe obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

Level 1 2 3 4

Display example

Buzzer Medium Fast Continuous

Level 1 2 3 4

Display example

Buzzer Slow Medium Fast Continuous

Level 1 2 3 4

Front corner sensors 1.6 to 1.3 ft.

(50 to 40 cm)1.3 to 1.0 ft.

(40 to 30 cm)1.0 ft. (30 cm)

or less

Rear corner sensors 1.6 to 1.2 ft.

(50 to 37.5 cm)1.2 to 0.8 ft.

(37.5 to 25 cm)0.8 ft. (25 cm)

or less

Rear center sensors

4.9 to 2.0 ft. (150 to 60 cm)

2.0 to 1.5 ft. (60 to 45 cm)

1.5 to 1.1 ft. (45 to 35 cm)

1.1 ft. (35 cm) or less

373


10

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

■ DETECTION LEVEL AND APPROXIMATE DISTANCE TO AN OBSTA-CLE (IS350C/IS250C)

Level 1 2 3 4

Front corner sensors 1.6 to 1.2 ft.

(50 to 37.5 cm)1.2 to 0.8 ft.

(37.5 to 25 cm)0.8 ft. (25 cm)

or less

Rear corner sensors 1.6 to 1.2 ft.

(50 to 37.5 cm)1.2 to 0.8 ft.

(37.5 to 25 cm)0.8 ft. (25 cm)

or less

Rear center sensors

4.9 to 2.0 ft. (150 to 60 cm)

2.0 to 1.5 ft. (60 to 45 cm)

1.5 to 1.1 ft. (45 to 35 cm)

1.1 ft. (35 cm) or less

INFORMATION

●Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (See page 377.)

374


Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)

Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)The diagram shows the detection range of

the sensors. Note that the sensors cannotdetect obstacles that are extremely close tothe vehicle.The range of the sensors may change

depending on the shape of the object etc.

There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.A sensor is frozen.A sensor is covered in any way.The vehicle is leaning considerably to one

side.On an extremely bumpy road, on an

incline, on gravel, or on grassThe vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to

vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, airbrakes of large vehicles, or other loudnoises producing ultrasonic waves.There is another vehicle equipped with

parking assist-sensors in the vicinity.A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or

heavy rain.The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole

or radio antenna.Towing eyelets are installed.A bumper or sensor receives a strong

impact.The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-

angled curb. In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered

suspension etc.) is installed.

DETECTION RANGE OF THE SENSORS

SENSOR DETECTION INFORMATION

Certain vehicle conditions and the sur-rounding environment may affect theability of a sensor to correctly detect anobstacle. Particular instances where thismay occur are listed below.

In addition to the examples above, thereare instances in which, because of theirshapes, signs and other objects may bejudged by a sensor to be closer than theyare.

375


10

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

The shape of the obstacle may prevent asensor from detecting it. Pay particularattention to the following obstacles:• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.• Cotton, snow and other materials that

absorb sound waves• Sharply-angled objects• Low obstacles• Tall obstacles with upper sections project-

ing outwards in the direction of your vehi-cle

CAUTION

●Caution when using the intuitive parkingassist-sensorObserve the following precautions.Failing to do so may result in the vehiclebeing unable to be driven safely and pos-sibly cause an accident.• Do not use the sensor at speeds in

excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).• Do not attach any accessories within

the sensor range.●Even though sensors which are function-

ing properly continue to detect obstacles,never use the intuitive parking assist ifone more sensor(s) may be malfunction-ing.

NOTICE

●Notes when washing the vehicle●Do not apply intensive bursts of water or

steam to the sensor area.●Doing so may result in the sensor mal-

functioning.●As the intuitive parking assist-sensor

might be malfunctioning in the followingcases, have it checked by your Lexusdealer.• The graphic which indicates that an

obstacle has been detected does notcome on and a beep does not soundeven when the intuitive parking assistmode is turned on.

• The graphic which indicates that anobstacle has been detected comes ondespite no obstacle around the vehicle.

• If your vehicle has been involved in anaccident.

• If the graphic which indicates that anobstacles has been detected remainson without a beeping sound.

376


Multi-information display

Multi-information display

If this message appears, have the intuitiveparking assist-sensor checked by yourLexus dealer.

For vehicles sold in Canada.

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST-SENSOR FAILURE WARNING

If an error is detected when the intuitiveparking assist-sensor is turned on, thevehicle symbol comes on or flashes withbeeping sounds.

INFORMATION

●The intuitive parking assist-sensor failurewarning display is not given in either ofthe following operations:• Changing to another screen• Turning off the main switch for the intui-

tive parking assist-sensor

WHEN SNOWFLAKES OR MUD GETS ON THE SENSORS

INFORMATION

●If this message appears, remove the for-eign matter from the sensor.

●If the failure warning does not go off evenafter the foreign matter is removed, theintuitive parking assist-sensor may bemalfunctioning. Have it checked by yourLexus dealer.

WHEN THE SENSOR IS MALFUNCTIONING

CERTIFICATION

This ISM device complies with CanadianICES-001.Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la

norme NMB-001 du Canada.

377


10

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING


2 Touch “Vehicle”.

3 Touch “LEXUS Park Assist”.

4 Touch the desired button.

5 Touch “Save”.



3 Touch “LEXUS Park Assist” on the“Vehicle Settings” screen.


The volume has 5 levels, increasing withhigher value.

5 Touch “Save”.

The volume of the beeps, turning on oroff of the display, etc. can be set.

SETTING AN ALERT VOLUME

The alert volume can be adjusted.

378





4 Touch “Display Off” to turn off theparking sonar display.

5 Touch “Save”.




4 Touch “Rear”.

Each time “Rear” is selected, the displayand tone indication distance changesbetween long and short.

5 Touch “Save”.

SETTING A PARKING SONAR DISPLAY

Parking sonar display can be set to on oroff.

INFORMATION

●Although “Display Off” is selected, if theobstacle is detected during the intuitiveparking assist monitoring, the warningappears on the right top of the screen.

SETTING A DISPLAY AND TONE INDICATION

Back sensors display and tone indicationcan be set.

379

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

INDEX

380

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

A

A/C .................................................................. 284, 295Adding destinations................................................... 91Air conditioning system ....................................... 287Air flow control buttons .......................... 284, 288Air intake control button ......................... 284, 290AM................................................................................. 210Apps............................................................................ 346

Activating “Apps”............................................. 346Inputting keyword operation......................... 351Linking “Apps” and navigation

local function ................................................. 349Audio .......................................................................... 202AUDIO button ........................................................ 202Audio language code ........................................... 237Audio settings ......................................................... 280

HD Radio™ system settings ........................ 280iPod settings ......................................................... 281

Audio split screen display .................................. 205Audio/video remote controls

(steering switches) ........................................... 268Audio/video system ............................................. 202AUTO button............................................... 284, 287Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)................. 206AUX port.................................................................. 209

B

Basic function.............................................................. 28Bluetooth® ................................................................ 138Bluetooth® audio................................................... 257

Connecting a Bluetooth® audio player..................................................... 261

Playing Bluetooth® audio ............................. 263Bluetooth® phone .................................................. 138Bluetooth® phone message function............. 162

Checking messages.......................................... 162New message notification.............................. 164Replying (quick reply) ...................................... 163

Bluetooth® settings ............................................... 187Detailed Bluetooth® settings........................ 195Registered devices............................................ 187Selecting a Bluetooth® phone ..................... 192Selecting portable player ............................... 193

Brightness.......................................................... 34, 234

C

Call on the Bluetooth® phone ............................ 151By call history ....................................................... 153By dial........................................................................ 151By phonebook ....................................................... 151By POI call ............................................................ 157By speed dial ........................................................ 153By voice recognition......................................... 155Calling using an SMS/MMS message...... 157

CD................................................................................ 223Changing the screen off image........................... 53Changing the startup image.................................. 51Climate control ....................................................... 286Color .................................................................. 50, 234Command list .......................................................... 307Contrast ............................................................. 34, 234Covered area ........................................................... 312Current position calibration ............................... 124Current position display......................................... 35

381

D

Deleting destinations............................................... 92Deleting personal data ........................................... 54Deleting previous destinations............................ 116Deleting set destinations........................................ 80DEST button...................................................................10Destination Assist .................................................. 353

Make a call with Destination Assist........... 353“Destination” screen................................................ 20Destination search.................................................... 62

By “Address”.......................................................... 64By “Address Book” ............................................. 75By “Coordinates” ................................................. 79By “Destination Assist” ....................................... 74By “Emergency” ................................................... 75By home................................................................... 63By “Intersection & Freeway” ............................ 76By “Map”.................................................................. 79By “Point of Interest”............................................ 67By preset destinations........................................ 63By “Previous Destinations” ............................... 74Selecting the search area................................. 62

Detailed navigation settings ................................. 117Detour setting ............................................................ 93Dial ................................................................................ 155Disc slot...................................................................... 202Distance and time to destination........................ 90Driver’s side temperature

control buttons........................................ 284, 287DSP control.............................................................. 206Dual .................................................................. 284, 287DVD ............................................................................ 208

DVD player............................................................... 223DVD options ....................................................... 232DVD player and DVD video disc

information ....................................................... 241Ejecting a disc ..................................................... 223If the player malfunctions ................................ 241Inserting a disc .................................................... 223Operating a DVD disc.................................... 229Playing a disc....................................................... 224Playing a DVD disc.......................................... 230Playing an MP3/WMA disc......................... 226

E

eDestination............................................................. 355Download eDestinations............................... 355Retrieve an eDestination............................... 356Show eDestination icons................................ 357

Eject button.............................................................. 202Expanded voice commands ............................. 306

F

Fan off button................................... 284, 287, 288Fan speed control buttons ..................... 284, 288FM.................................................................................. 210Foot print map............................................................. 44Function index ............................................................. 18

G

General settings ........................................................ 46GPS (Global Positioning System) ............ 10, 133

H

HD Radio™................................................................ 213Heading-up screen................................................... 45Home.............................................................. 12, 17, 103

382

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

I

INFO button..................................................................10Information................................................................. 312“Information” screen ................................................ 24Initial screen................................................................ 28Inputting letters and numbers ............................. 30Internet radio broadcast...................................... 222Intuitive parking assist.......................................... 370iPod ............................................................................. 250

Connecting iPod .............................................. 250Playing iPod music............................................. 251Playing iPod video............................................ 254

K

Keyboard layout........................................................ 50

L

Language ...................................................................... 49Lexus Enform with Safety Connect ............... 336

Preparation before using Apps.................. 340Lexus Insider............................................................ 358

Lexus Insider settings........................................ 361New message notification ............................ 360View and play received

Lexus Insider messages ............................ 358Limitations of the navigation system................ 133List screen operation .............................................. 30

M

Map ................................................................................ 35Map database information and updates...... 385Map database version and

coverage area...................................................... 312Map icons ..................................................................... 45Map scale...................................................................... 43Map screen ................................................................... 10MAP/VOICE button ............................................... 10Micro dust and pollen filter button.......284, 294MP3 ....................................................... 226, 274, 277

N

Natural speech information............................... 304Navigation settings................................................. 102Navigation system .................................................... 62North-up screen........................................................ 45

O

Operation flow: guiding the route ...................... 16Orientation of the map ........................................... 45

P

Passenger’s side temperature control buttons ....................................... 284, 287

Pausing guidance...................................................... 97Phone (hands-free system for

cellular phone) .................................................... 140Using the phone switch ..................................... 141Using the steering switches ........................... 142When selling or disposing

of the vehicle ................................................... 143Phone settings .......................................................... 165

Message settings................................................ 180Phone display settings...................................... 184Phone sound settings ....................................... 165Phonebook ............................................................ 167

Phonebook ........................................................ 151, 167POI call........................................................................ 157POI icons...................................................................... 98Point of Interest.......................................................... 67Preset destinations ............................................ 14, 63PRST·TRACK button ........................................... 202PWR·VOL knob..................................................... 202

Q

Quick guide.................................................................. 10

383

R

Radio ............................................................................ 210Listening to the radio........................................ 210Presetting a station............................................ 210Radio broadcast data system.......................... 211Selecting a station................................................ 211Traffic announcement....................................... 212

Rear view monitor system.................................. 364Rear window and outside rear view

mirror defogger button ....................... 284, 293Receive on the Bluetooth® phone.................. 158Register a Bluetooth® phone............................. 146

Connecting a Bluetooth® phone ............... 148Reconnecting the Bluetooth® phone....... 150

Registering home ....................................................... 12Registering preset destinations ............................ 14Reordering destinations........................................... 91Resuming guidance ................................................. 97Route guidance ........................................................... 81Route guidance screen .......................................... 84Route overview.......................................................... 94Route preference...................................................... 95Route trace.................................................................. 101

S

Satellite radio (SAT) .................................... 206, 217Screen adjustment .................................................... 33Screen off.......................................................... 34, 234Screen scroll operation........................................... 36Screen settings adjustment ................................... 33Selecting POI icons to be displayed ................ 98Selecting screen size ............................................ 207Setting and deleting destinations......................... 91Setting home as the destination ........................... 17Setting route ................................................................ 93Setting up the “Address Book”.......................... 107Setting up the “Areas to Avoid” .......................... 112Setting up the “Home”........................................... 103Setting up the “Preset Destinations” ............... 105SETUP button ......................................... 10, 138, 202“Setup” screen ............................................................ 22Show on map.............................................................. 98SMS/MMS message ................................... 157, 162Speed dial ................................................................... 153Standard map icons.................................................. 45Starting route guidance ........................................... 81Steering switches.............................. 142, 268, 298Surround .................................................................... 207System time.................................................................. 47

384

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

T

Talk on the Bluetooth® phone........................... 159Incoming call waiting ......................................... 161

Tire change calibration ......................................... 124Tone ............................................................................. 234Tone and balance ................................................... 207Traffic incidents ...................................................... 330TUNE·SCROLL knob......................................... 202Typical voice guidance prompts ......................... 87

U

USB memory............................................................ 244Connecting a USB memory ......................... 244Playing a USB memory.................................. 245

USB port ................................................................... 209

V

Vehicle settings ........................................................ 127Maintenance ........................................................ 127

Voice command system .............. 205, 286, 298Voice recognition.................................................... 155Voice settings.............................................................. 56Voice volume .............................................................. 56

W

Windshield air flow button....................... 284, 291WMA..................................................... 226, 274, 277

X

XM Fuel Prices ....................................................... 323Show XM Fuel Prices information............. 323View detailed fuel price information......... 323XM Fuel Prices settings ................................. 324

XM NavTraffic® ................................................... 330Show traffic event ............................................ 330Show XM NavTraffic® information........... 331

XM NavWeather™ .............................................. 326Show XM NavWeather™ information ... 326Weather information ....................................... 328Weather warnings ............................................ 329XM NavWeather™ indicator...................... 329

XM Satellite Radio broadcast ............................ 217Channel category .............................................. 218Displaying the radio ID ..................................... 217Displaying the title and name........................ 219How to subscribe to an

XM Satellite Radio ........................................ 217If the satellite radio tuner

malfunctions ................................................... 220Listening to satellite radio............................... 218Presetting a channel ......................................... 218Selecting a channel ........................................... 219

XM services .............................................................. 314XM settings .............................................................. 333XM Sports................................................................... 317

Receive sports information............................. 317XM Sports settings — add or

delete teams.................................................... 318XM Stocks ................................................................ 320

Receive stock data ........................................... 320XM Stocks settings — add or

delete stocks ................................................... 321

Z

Zoom in button ........................................................... 10Zoom out button ........................................................ 10

385

Map database information and updates

This system uses the maps of DENSO.

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENTPLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENTCAREFULLY BEFORE USING THENAVIGATION SYSTEMTHIS IS A LICENSE AGREEMENTFOR YOUR COPY OF THESPATIAL MAP DATABASE,INCLUDING LOCATION CODESAND RELATED PRODUCTS(COLLECTIVELY, THE“DATABASE”), USED IN THENAVIGATION SYSTEM. BY USINGTHE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ANDTHE DATABASE, YOU ACCEPTAND AGREE TO BE BOUND BYALL TERMS AND CONDITIONSSET FORTH BELOW.LICENSE GRANTDENSO CORPORATION(“DENSO”), as a licensed distributor ofthe DATABASE, grants to you anon-exclusive, non-perpetual license touse your copy of the DATABASE foryour personal use or for your use in yourbusiness’ internal operations and not forany other purpose. This license does notinclude the right to grant sub-licenses.

OWNERSHIPThe DATABASE and the copyrightsand intellectual property andneighboring rights therein are ownedby Tele Atlas North America, Inc.(“TANA”) and its licensors. ThisAgreement does not transfer any title orinterest in the DATABASE, except forthe license to use the DATABASEaccording and subject to the terms andconditions of this Agreement. You shallnot alter, obscure or remove anycopyright notices, trademark notices orother restrictive legends relating to theDATABASE.The DATABASE comprisesconfidential and proprietaryinformation and materials of TANA.Accordingly, you shall hold theDATABASE in confidence and trust.You shall take reasonable steps toprotect the DATABASE frommisappropriation or misuse. You shallnot extract stand-alone data from orpublish any part of the DATABASEwithout the prior written consent ofTANA and its licensors.

386

LIMITATIONS ON USEThe DATABASE is restricted for use inthe specific system for which it wascreated. Except to the extent explicitlypermitted by mandatory laws, you maynot extract or reutilize any portion of thecontents of the DATABASE, norreproduce, copy, duplicate, modify,adapt, translate, disassemble,decompile, or reverse engineer anyportion of the DATABASE.TRANSFERYou may not transfer the DATABASEto third parties, except together with thesystem for which it was created,provided that you do not retain anycopy of the DATABASE, and providedthat the transferee agrees to all termsand conditions of this AGREEMENT.

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTYTHE DATABASE IS PROVIDED ONAN “AS IS” AND “WITH ALL FAULTSBASIS” AND DENSO AND TANA(AND THEIR LICENSORS ANDSUPPLIERS) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMALL OTHER WARRANTIES,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFNON-INFRINGEMENT,MERCHANTABILITY,SATISFACTORY QUALITY,ACCURACY, TITLE AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICEOR INFORMATION PROVIDED BYDENSO OR TANA (OR ANY OFTHEIR LICENSORS, AGENTS,EMPLOYEES OR THIRD PARTYPROVIDERS) SHALL CREATE AWARRANTY, AND YOU ARE NOTENTITLED TO RELY ON ANYSUCH ADVICE ORINFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMEROF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIALCONDITION OF THISAGREEMENT.

387

LIMITATION OF LIABILITYIN NO EVENT SHALL DENSO ORTANA (OR THEIR LICENSORS ORSUPPLIERS) BE LIABLE FOR ANYINCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,SPECIAL, INDIRECT OREXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISINGOUT OF THIS AGREEMENT ORYOUR USE OF THE DATABASE,INCLUDING, WITHOUTLIMITATION, LOST PROFITS ORCOSTS OF COVER, LOSS OF USEOR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION ORTHE LIKE, REGARDLESS OFWHETHER THE PARTY WASADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OFSUCH DAMAGES.IN NO EVENT WILL THE TOTALLIABILITY OF DENSO OR TANA(OR THEIR LICENSORS ORSUPPLIERS) EXCEED THEAMOUNTS PAID BY YOU FOR THEDATABASE.

WARNINGSThe DATABASE comprises facts andinformation from government and othersources reflecting circumstances inexistence before you received theDATABASE, which may contain errorsand omissions. Accordingly, theDATABASE may contain inaccurate orincomplete information due to thepassage of time, changingcircumstances, and due to the nature ofthe sources used. The DATABASEdoes not include or reflect informationrelating to, among other things,neighborhood safety; law enforcement;emergency assistance; constructionwork; road or lane closures; vehicle orspeed restrictions; road slope or grade;bridge height, weight or other limits;road or traffic conditions; specialevents; traffic congestion; or travel time.

388

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTSIf you are an agency, department, orother entity of the United StatesGovernment, or funded in whole or inpart by the United States Government,then use, duplication, reproduction,release, modification, disclosure ortransfer of this commercial product andaccompanying documentation, isrestricted in accordance with theLIMITED or RESTRICTED rights asdescribed in DFARS252.227-7014(a)(1) (JUN 1995)(DOD commercial computer softwaredefinition), DFARS 227.7202-1 (DODpolicy on commercial computersoftware), FAR 52.227-19 (JUN 1987)(commercial computer software clausefor civilian agencies), DFARS252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DODtechnical data - commercial itemsclause); FAR 52.227-14 Alternates I, II,and III (JUN 1987) (civilian agencytechnical data and noncommercialcomputer software clause); and/orFAR 12.211 and FAR 12.212(commercial item acquisitions), asapplicable. In case of conflict betweenany of the FAR and DFARS provisionslisted herein and this Agreement, theconstruction that provides greaterlimitations on the Government’s rightsshall control.

Contractor/manufacturer is Tele AtlasNorth America, Inc., 11 Lafayette Street,Lebanon, NH 03766-1445. Phone:603.643. 0330. The DATABASE ismade by Tele Atlas North America, Inc.ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Forpurpose of any public disclosureprovision under any federal, state orlocal law, it is agreed that theDATABASE is a trade secret and aproprietary commercial product andnot subject to disclosure.If you are an agency, department, orother entity of any State government,the United States Government or anyother public entity or funded in whole orin part by the United StatesGovernment, then you hereby agree toprotect the DATABASE from publicdisclosure and to consider theDATABASE exempt from any statute,law, regulation, or code, including anySunshine Act, Public Records Act,Freedom of Information Act, orequivalent, which permits public accessand/or reproduction or use of theLicensed Products. In the event thatsuch exemption is challenged underany such laws, this Agreement shall beconsidered breached and any and allright to retain any copies or to use of theDATABASE shall be terminated andconsidered immediately null and void.Any copies of the DATABASE held byyou shall immediately be destroyed.

389

If any court of competent jurisdictionconsiders this clause void andunenforceable, in whole or in part, forany reason, this Agreement shall beconsidered terminated and null andvoid, in its entirety, and any and allcopies of the DATABASE shallimmediately be destroyed.END-USER TERMSThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not forresale. It is protected by copyright, andis subject to the following terms andconditions which are agreed to by you,on the one hand, and DENSOCORPORATION (“DENSO”) and itslicensors (including their licensors andsuppliers) on the other hand.© 2009* NAVTEQ. All rightsreserved.* original publication dateNAVTEQ holds a non-exclusivelicense from the United States PostalService® to publish and sell ZIP+4®

information.

©United States Postal Service®

2009*. Prices are not established,controlled or approved by the UnitedStates Postal Service®. The followingtrademarks and registrations areowned by the USPS: United StatesPostal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.*original publication date

TERMS AND CONDITIONSPersonal Use Only. You agree to usethis Data together with vehiclenavigation system for the solelypersonal, non-commercial purposes forwhich you were licensed, and not forservice bureau, time-sharing or othersimilar purposes. Accordingly, butsubject to the restrictions set forth in thefollowing paragraphs, you may copythis Data only as necessary for yourpersonal use to (i) view it, and (ii) save it,provided that you do not remove anycopyright notices that appear and donot modify the Data in any way. Youagree not to otherwise reproduce,copy, modify, decompile, disassembleor reverse engineer any portion of thisData, and may not transfer or distributeit in any form, for any purpose, except tothe extent permitted by mandatorylaws. Multi-disc sets may only betransferred or sold as a complete set asprovided by DENSO and not as asubset thereof.

390

Restrictions. Except where you havebeen specifically licensed to do so byDENSO, and without limiting thepreceding paragraph, you may not (a)use this Data with any products,systems, or applications installed orotherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles, capableof vehicle navigation, positioning,dispatch, real time route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications; or(b) with or in communication with anypositioning devices or any mobile orwireless-connected electronic orcomputer devices, including withoutlimitation cellular phones, palmtop andhandheld computers, pagers, andpersonal digital assistants or PDAs.Warning. The Data may containinaccurate or incomplete informationdue to the passage of time, changingcircumstances, sources used and thenature of collecting comprehensivegeographic data, any of which may leadto incorrect results.

No Warranty. This Data is provided toyou “as is,” and you agree to use it atyour own risk. DENSO and its licensors(and their licensors and suppliers) makeno guarantees, representations orwarranties of any kind, express orimplied, arising by law or otherwise,including but not limited to, content,quality, accuracy, completeness,effectiveness, reliability, fitness for aparticular purpose, usefulness, use orresults to be obtained from this Data, orthat the Data or server will beuninterrupted or error-free.Disclaimer of Warranty: DENSO ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDINGTHEIR LICENSORS ANDSUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANYWARRANTIES, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, OF QUALITY,PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ORNON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,Territories and Countries do not allowcertain warranty exclusions, so to thatextent the above exclusion may notapply to you.

391

Disclaimer of Liability: DENSO ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDINGTHEIR LICENSORS ANDSUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLETO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATUREOF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGINGANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES,DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICHMAY RESULT FROM THE USE ORPOSSESSION OF THEINFORMATION; OR FOR ANYLOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, ORANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OFOR INABILITY TO USE THISINFORMATION, ANY DEFECT INTHE INFORMATION, OR THEBREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN ANACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORTOR BASED ON A WARRANTY,EVEN IF DENSO OR ITSLICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISEDOF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES. Some States, Territoriesand Countries do not allow certainliability exclusions or damageslimitations, so to that extent the abovemay not apply to you.

Export Control. You agree not toexport from anywhere any part of theData provided to you or any directproduct thereof except in compliancewith, and with all licenses and approvalsrequired under, applicable export laws,rules and regulations.Entire Agreement. These terms andconditions constitute the entireagreement between DENSO (and itslicensors, including their licensors andsuppliers) and you pertaining to thesubject matter hereof, and supersedesin their entirety any and all written ororal agreements previously existingbetween us with respect to such subjectmatter.Governing Law. The above terms andconditions shall be governed by thelaws of the State of Illinois, withoutgiving effect to (i) its conflict of lawsprovisions, or (ii) the United NationsConvention for Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods, which isexplicitly excluded. You agree tosubmit to the jurisdiction of the State ofIllinois for any and all disputes, claimsand actions arising from or inconnection with the Data provided toyou hereunder.

392

Government End Users. If the Data isbeing acquired by or on behalf of theUnited States government or any otherentity seeking or applying rights similarto those customarily claimed by theUnited States government, this Data is a“commercial item” as that term isdefined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, islicensed in accordance with theseEnd-User Terms, and each copy ofData delivered or otherwise furnishedshall be marked and embedded asappropriate with the following “Noticeof Use,” and shall be treated inaccordance with such Notice:

If the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federalofficial refuses to use the legendprovided herein, the ContractingOfficer, federal government agency, orany federal official must notifyNAVTEQ prior to seeking additional oralternative rights in the Data.

NOTICE OF USECONTRACTOR

(MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME: NAVTEQCONTRACTOR

(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606

This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User Terms under which

this data was provided.© 2009* NAVTEQ - All rights

reserved. *original publication date

END USER NOTICEPLEASE READ THIS NOTICECAREFULLY BEFORE USING THISNAVIGATION SYSTEMThe Point Of Interest Data (“POI” Data)in the navigation system is in partprovided by Infogroup Inc.(“Infogroup”). By using the POI Data,you accept and agree to all terms andconditions set forth below.1. OwnershipAll rights, title and interest to theInfogroup POI Data shall be retained byInfogroup.2. Limitations on useExcept to the extent explicitly permittedby mandatory laws, you may not extractor re-utilize any portion of the contentsof the POI Data, nor reproduce, copy,modify, adapt, translate, disassemble,decompile, or reverse engineer anyportion of the POI Data.3. TransferYou may not transfer the POI Data tothird parties, except together with thesystem for which it was created,provided that you do not retain anycopy of the POI Data.

393

4. Disclaimer of warrantyEXCEPT AS STATED HEREIN,INFOGROUP MAKES NOEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTYOF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE OR WARRANTY OFMERCHANTABILITY.5. Limitation of LiabilityEITHER INFOGROUP ORSUPPLIER OF POI DATA SHALLNOT BE LIABLE FOR ANYINDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL ORINCIDENTAL DAMAGES MADEOR ALLEGED IN CONNECTIONWITH YOUR USE OF THE POIDATA.

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENTPersonal Use Only. You agree to usethis information for solely personal,non-commercial purposes, and not forservice bureau, time-sharing or othersimilar purposes. You may not modifythe information or remove anycopyright notices that appear on theinformation in any way. You may notdecompile, disassemble or reverseengineer any portion of this information,and may not transfer or distribute it inany form, for any purpose. Withoutlimiting the foregoing, you may not usethis information with any products,systems, or applications installed orotherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles, capableof vehicle navigation, positioning,dispatch, real time route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications.

394

No Warranty. This information isprovided to you “as is,” and you agree touse it at your own risk. DENSO and itslicensors (and their licensors andsuppliers, collectively “DENSO”) makeno guarantees, representations orwarranties of any kind, express orimplied, arising by law or otherwise,including but not limited to, andDENSO expressly disclaims anywarranties regarding content, quality,accuracy, completeness, effectiveness,reliability, fitness for a particularpurpose, non-infringement, usefulness,use or results to be obtained from thisinformation, or that the information orserver will be uninterrupted orerror-free. Some states, territories andcountries do not allow certain warrantyexclusions, so to that extent, the aboveexclusion may not apply to you.

Disclaimer of Liability: DENSO SHALLNOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF ITS NATURE,ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT,INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIALOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,INCLUDING ANY LOSS OFPROFIT, REVENUE ORCONTRACTS ARISING OUT OFYOUR POSSESSION, USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THISINFORMATION, ANY DEFECT INTHE INFORMATION, OR THEBREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN ANACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORTOR BASED ON A WARRANTY,EVEN IF DENSO OR ITSLICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISEDOF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES. Some states, territoriesand countries do not allow certainliability exclusions or damageslimitations, so to that extent the abovemay not apply to you.

395

Indemnity. You agree to indemnify,defend and hold DENSO and itslicensors (including their respectivelicensors, suppliers, assignees,subsidiaries, affiliated companies, andthe respective officers, directors,employees, shareholders, agents andrepresentatives of each of them) freeand harmless from and against anyliability, loss, injury (including injuriesresulting in death), demand, action,cost, expense, or claim of any kind orcharacter, including but not limited toattorney’s fees, arising out of or inconnection with any use or possessionby you of this information.END USER NOTICEThe marks of companies displayed bythis product to indicate businesslocations are the marks of theirrespective owners. The use of suchmarks in this product does not imply anysponsorship, approval, or endorsementby such companies of this product.

396

This product uses the following opensource software.

· T-KernelThis Product uses the Source Code ofT-Kernel under T-License granted bythe T-Engine Forum (www.t-engine.org).· C LibraryThis product includes softwaredeveloped by the University ofCalifornia, Berkeley and itscontributors. This product includessoftware developed by the University ofCalifornia, Lawrence BerkeleyLaboratory.Copyright © 1982, 1985, 1993 TheRegents of the University of California.All rights reserved.Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1993 TheRegents of the University of California.All rights reserved.Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1989, 1993The Regents of the University ofCalifornia. All rights reserved.© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Allor some portions of this file are derivedfrom material licensed to the Universityof California by American Telephoneand Telegraph Co. or Unix SystemLaboratories, Inc. and are reproducedherein with the permission of UNIXSystem Laboratories, Inc.Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993,1994 The Regents of the University ofCalifornia. All rights reserved.

© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Allor some portions of this file are derivedfrom material licensed to the Universityof California by American Telephoneand Telegraph Co. or Unix SystemLaboratories, Inc. and are reproducedherein with the permission of UNIXSystem Laboratories, Inc.Copyright © 1983, 1990, 1993 TheRegents of the University of California.All rights reserved.© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Allor some portions of this file are derivedfrom material licensed to the Universityof California by American Telephoneand Telegraph Co. or Unix SystemLaboratories, Inc. and are reproducedherein with the permission of UNIXSystem Laboratories, Inc.Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.Copyright © 1987, 1991, 1993 TheRegents of the University of California.All rights reserved.Copyright © 1987, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.Copyright © 1988 Regents of theUniversity of California. All rightsreserved.Copyright © 1988 University of Utah.Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved. This code is derived fromsoftware contributed to Berkeley by theSystems Programming Group of theUniversity of Utah Computer ScienceDepartment and Ralph Campbell.

Open source license

397

Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved. This code is derived fromsoftware contributed to Berkeley byArthur David Olson of the NationalCancer Institute.Copyright © 1989 The Regents of theUniversity of California. All rightsreserved.Copyright © 1989 The Regents of theUniversity of California. All rightsreserved.© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Allor some portions of this file are derivedfrom material licensed to the Universityof California by American Telephoneand Telegraph Co. or Unix SystemLaboratories, Inc. and are reproducedherein with the permission of UNIXSystem Laboratories, Inc.Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Allor some portions of this file are derivedfrom material licensed to the Universityof California by American Telephoneand Telegraph Co. or Unix SystemLaboratories, Inc. and are reproducedherein with the permission of UNIXSystem Laboratories, Inc.Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.

This code is derived from softwarecontributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to Berkeley by BerkeleySoftware Design, Inc.Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved. Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to Berkeley by RalphCampbell.Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Allor some portions of this file are derivedfrom material licensed to the Universityof California by American Telephoneand Telegraph Co. or Unix SystemLaboratories, Inc. and are reproducedherein with the permission of UNIXSystem Laboratories, Inc.Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.

398

This software was developed by theComputer Systems Engineering groupat Lawrence Berkeley Laboratoryunder DARPA contract BG 91-66 andcontributed to Berkeley. All advertisingmaterials mentioning features or use ofthis software must display the followingacknowledgement: This productincludes software developed by theUniversity of California, LawrenceBerkeley Laboratory.Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to Berkeley by RalphCampbell. This file is derived from theMIPS RISC Architecture book byGerry Kane.Copyright © 1993 The Regents of theUniversity of California. All rightsreserved.Copyright © 1994 The Regents of theUniversity of California. All rightsreserved.

This code is derived from softwarecontributed to Berkeley by AndrewHume of AT&T Bell Laboratories.Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. All advertising materials mentioningfeatures or use of this software mustdisplay the followingacknowledgement: This productincludes software developed by theUniversity of California, Berkeley andits contributors.4. Neither the name of the Universitynor the names of its contributors may beused to endorse or promote productsderived from this software withoutspecific prior written permission.

399

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE REGENTS ANDCONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE REGENTS ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FORANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, ORTORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.

Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents ofthe University of California. All rightsreserved.Copyright © 1983, 1990, 1993 TheRegents of the University of California.All rights reserved.Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. All advertising materials mentioningfeatures or use of this software mustdisplay the followingacknowledgement: This productincludes software developed by theUniversity of California, Berkeley andits contributors.4. Neither the name of the Universitynor the names of its contributors may beused to endorse or promote productsderived from this software withoutspecific prior written permission.

400


Portions Copyright © 1993 by DigitalEquipment Corporation.Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software for any purposewith or without fee is hereby granted,provided that the above copyrightnotice and this permission noticeappear in all copies, and that the nameof Digital Equipment Corporation notbe used in advertising or publicitypertaining to distribution of thedocument or software without specific,written prior permission.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““ASIS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENTCORP. DISCLAIMS ALLWARRANTIES WITH REGARD TOTHIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALLIMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITALEQUIPMENT CORPORATION BELIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,DIRECT, INDIRECT, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ORANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVERRESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERTORTIOUS ACTION, ARISINGOUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE USE ORPERFORMANCE OF THISSOFTWARE.

401

Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993The Regents of the University ofCalifornia. All rights reserved.Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. Neither the name of the Universitynor the names of its contributors may beused to endorse or promote productsderived from this software withoutspecific prior written permission.


402

This product includes softwaredeveloped by the NetBSD Foundation,Inc. and its contributors.Copyright © 1996 The NetBSDFoundation, Inc. All rights reserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to The NetBSD Foundationby J.T. Conklin.Copyright © 1997 The NetBSDFoundation, Inc. All rights reserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to The NetBSD Foundationby Klaus Klein.Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSDFoundation, Inc. All rights reserved.Copyright © 1997,98 The NetBSDFoundation, Inc. All rights reserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to The NetBSD Foundationby J.T. Conklin.Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSDFoundation, Inc. All rights reserved.This code was contributed to TheNetBSD Foundation by Klaus Klein.Copyright © 1998 The NetBSDFoundation, Inc. All rights reserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to The NetBSD Foundationby Klaus Klein.Copyright © 1998, 2000 TheNetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rightsreserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to The NetBSD Foundationby Klaus J. Klein.

Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSDFoundation, Inc. All rights reserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to The NetBSD Foundationby Julian Coleman.Copyright © 2000 The NetBSDFoundation, Inc. All rights reserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to The NetBSD Foundationby Dieter Baron and Thomas Klausner.Copyright © 2000, 2001 TheNetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rightsreserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to The NetBSD Foundationby Jun-ichiro itojun Hagino and byKlaus Klein.Copyright © 2001 The NetBSDFoundation, Inc. All rights reserved.This code is derived from softwarecontributed to The NetBSD Foundationby Klaus Klein.

403

Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. All advertising materials mentioningfeatures or use of this software mustdisplay the followingacknowledgement: This productincludes software developed by theNetBSD Foundation, Inc. and itscontributors.4. Neither the name of The NetBSDFoundation nor the names of itscontributors may be used to endorse orpromote products derived from thissoftware without specific prior writtenpermission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC.AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” ANDANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE FOUNDATION ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FORANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, ORTORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.This product includes softwaredeveloped by Christos Zoulas.Copyright © 1997 Christos Zoulas. Allrights reserved.

404

Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. All advertising materials mentioningfeatures or use of this software mustdisplay the followingacknowledgement: This productincludes software developed byChristos Zoulas.4. The name of the author may not beused to endorse or promote productsderived from this software withoutspecific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, ORTORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.This product includes softwaredeveloped by Winning Strategies, Inc.Copyright © 1994 Winning Strategies,Inc. All rights reserved.

405

Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. All advertising materials mentioningfeatures or use of this software mustdisplay the followingacknowledgement: This productincludes software developed byWinning Strategies, Inc.4. The name of the author may not beused to endorse or promote productsderived from this software withoutspecific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, ORTORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.

406

Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1997, and1998 WIDE Project. All rightsreserved.Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. Neither the name of the project northe names of its contributors may beused to endorse or promote productsderived from this software withoutspecific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE PROJECT ANDCONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE PROJECT ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FORANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, ORTORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.

407

Copyright ©1999 Citrus Project, Allrights reserved.Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE AUTHOR ANDCONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE AUTHOR ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FORANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, ORTORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.Copyright © 1995 Carnegie-MellonUniversity. All rights reserved. Author:Chris G. DemetriouCopyright © 1995, 1996Carnegie-Mellon University. All rightsreserved. Author: Chris G. Demetriou

408

Permission to use, copy, modify anddistribute this software and itsdocumentation is hereby granted,provided that both the copyright noticeand this permission notice appear in allcopies of the software, derivative worksor modified versions, and any portionsthereof, and that both notices appear insupporting documentation.CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWSFREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE INITS ““AS IS”” CONDITION.CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMSANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND FORANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVERRESULTING FROM THE USE OFTHIS SOFTWARE.Carnegie Mellon requests users of thissoftware to return to SoftwareDistribution Coordinator [email protected] of Computer Science CarnegieMellon University Pittsburgh PA15213-3890 any improvements orextensions that they make and grantCarnegie the rights to redistributethese changes.· TCP/IP, Socket LibraryThis product includes softwaredeveloped by the University ofCalifornia, Berkeley and itscontributors.

Copyright © 1980, 1983, 1988, 1993The Regents of the University ofCalifornia. All rights reserved.Copyright © 1983, 1987, 1989 TheRegents of the University of California.All rights reserved.Copyright © 1983, 1989, 1993 TheRegents of the University of California.All rights reserved.Copyright © 1985, 1988, 1993 TheRegents of the University of California.All rights reserved.Copyright © 1985, 1993 The Regentsof the University of California. All rightsreserved.Copyright © 1989, 1993, 1995 TheRegents of the University of California.All rights reserved.

409

Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. All advertising materials mentioningfeatures or use of this software mustdisplay the followingacknowledgement: This productincludes software developed by theUniversity of California, Berkeley andits contributors.4. Neither the name of the Universitynor the names of its contributors may beused to endorse or promote productsderived from this software withoutspecific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE REGENTS ANDCONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE REGENTS ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FORANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, ORTORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.Copyright © 2004 by InternetSystems Consortium, Inc. (““ISC””)Portions Copyright © 1996-1999 byInternet Software Consortium.Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software for any purposewith or without fee is hereby granted,provided that the above copyrightnotice and this permission noticeappear in all copies.

410

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““ASIS”” AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALLWARRANTIES WITH REGARD TOTHIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALLIMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BELIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,DIRECT, INDIRECT, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ORANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVERRESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERTORTIOUS ACTION, ARISINGOUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE USE ORPERFORMANCE OF THISSOFTWARE.Portions Copyright © 1993 by DigitalEquipment Corporation.Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software for any purposewith or without fee is hereby granted,provided that the above copyrightnotice and this permission noticeappear in all copies, and that the nameof Digital Equipment Corporation notbe used in advertising or publicitypertaining to distribution of thedocument or software without specific,written prior permission.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““ASIS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENTCORP. DISCLAIMS ALLWARRANTIES WITH REGARD TOTHIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALLIMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITALEQUIPMENT CORPORATION BELIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,DIRECT, INDIRECT, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ORANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVERRESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERTORTIOUS ACTION, ARISINGOUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE USE ORPERFORMANCE OF THISSOFTWARE.This product includes softwaredeveloped by WIDE Project and itscontributors.Portions Copyright © 1995, 1996,1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. Allrights reserved.

411

Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. All advertising materials mentioningfeatures or use of this software mustdisplay the followingacknowledgement: This productincludes software developed by WIDEProject and its contributors.4. Neither the name of the project northe names of its contributors may beused to endorse or promote productsderived from this software withoutspecific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE PROJECT ANDCONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE PROJECT ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FORANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, ORTORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.Copyright © 1988 Stephen Deering.Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents ofthe University of California. All rightsreserved.

412

Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. [rescinded 22 July 1999]4. Neither the name of the Universitynor the names of its contributors may beused to endorse or promote productsderived from this software withoutspecific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE REGENTS ANDCONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE REGENTS ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FORANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, ORTORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1988Regents of the University of California.All rights reserved.

413

Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms are permitted providedthat the above copyright notice and thisparagraph are duplicated in all suchforms and that any documentation andother materials related to suchdistribution and use acknowledge thatthe software was developed by theUniversity of California, Berkeley. Thename of the University may not be usedto endorse or promote productsderived from this software withoutspecific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED““AS IS”” AND WITHOUT ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.Rights, responsibilities and use of thissoftware are controlled by theagreement found in the ““LICENSE.H””file distributed with this source code.““LICENSE.H”” may not be removedfrom this distribution, modified,enhanced nor references to it omitted.

Copyright 1983 by the MassachusettsInstitute of Technology Copyright 1984 by the MassachusettsInstitute of TechnologyCopyright 1984, 1985 by theMassachusetts Institute of Technology Copyright 1990 by NetPort Software Copyright 1990-1993 by NetPortSoftware. Copyright 1990-1994 by NetPortSoftware.Copyright 1990-1996 by NetPortSoftware.Copyright 1990-1997 by NetPortSoftware.Copyright 1993 by NetPort Software Copyright 1986 by Carnegie MellonAll Rights Reserved

414

Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software and itsdocumentation for any purpose andwithout fee is hereby granted, providedthat the above copyright notice appearin all copies and that both that copyrightnotice and this permission noticeappear in supporting documentation,and that the name of CMU not be usedin advertising or publicity pertaining todistribution of the software withoutspecific, written prior permission.· OpenSSLThis product includes softwaredeveloped by the OpenSSL Project foruse in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This productincludes cryptographic softwarewritten by Eric Young([email protected]). This productincludes software written by TimHudson ([email protected]).OpenSSL LicenseCopyright © 1998-2008 TheOpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the above copyright notice, thislist of conditions and the followingdisclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. All advertising materials mentioningfeatures or use of this software mustdisplay the following acknowledgment:“This product includes softwaredeveloped by the OpenSSL Project foruse in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and“OpenSSL Project” must not be used toendorse or promote products derivedfrom this software without prior writtenpermission. For written permission,please contact [email protected]. Products derived from this softwaremay not be called “OpenSSL” nor may“OpenSSL” appear in their nameswithout prior written permission of theOpenSSL Project.6. Redistributions of any formwhatsoever must retain the followingacknowledgment: “This productincludes software developed by theOpenSSL Project for use in theOpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”

415

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS”AND ANY EXPRESSED ORIMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT ORITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, ORTORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.This product includes cryptographicsoftware written by Eric Young([email protected]). This productincludes software written by TimHudson ([email protected]).Original SSLeay LicenseCopyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young([email protected]) All rightsreserved.

This package is an SSL implementationwritten by Eric Young([email protected]). Theimplementation was written so as toconform with Netscapes SSL. Thislibrary is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the followingconditions are aheared to. Thefollowing conditions apply to all codefound in this distribution, be it the RC4,RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just theSSL code. The SSL documentationincluded with this distribution is coveredby the same copyright terms except thatthe holder is Tim Hudson([email protected]). Copyrightremains Eric Young’s, and as such anyCopyright notices in the code are not tobe removed. If this package is used in aproduct, Eric Young should be givenattribution as the author of the parts ofthe library used. This can be in the formof a textual message at program startupor in documentation (online or textual)provided with the package.Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:

416

1. Redistributions of source code mustretain the copyright notice, this list ofconditions and the following disclaimer.2. Redistributions in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.3. All advertising materials mentioningfeatures or use of this software mustdisplay the followingacknowledgement: “This productincludes cryptographic softwarewritten by Eric Young([email protected])” The word‘cryptographic’ can be left out if therouines from the library being used arenot cryptographic related :-).4. If you include any Windows specificcode (or a derivative thereof) from theapps directory (application code) youmust include an acknowledgement:“This product includes software writtenby Tim Hudson ([email protected])”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE AUTHOR ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FORANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, ORTORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANYWAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.The licence and distribution terms forany publically available version orderivative of this code cannot bechanged. i.e. this code cannot simply becopied and put under anotherdistribution licence [including the GNUPublic Licence.

table of contents - lexus€¦ · the navigation system is one of the most technologically advanced...

Documents